summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/66305-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old/66305-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--old/66305-0.txt7751
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 7751 deletions
diff --git a/old/66305-0.txt b/old/66305-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e8e7b9..0000000
--- a/old/66305-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7751 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg eBook of Machine-Gun Tactics, by R. V. K. Applin
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
-will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
-using this eBook.
-
-Title: Machine-Gun Tactics
-
-Author: R. V. K. Applin
-
-Release Date: September 14, 2021 [eBook #66305]
-
-Language: English
-
-Character set encoding: UTF-8
-
-Produced by: deaurider, John Campbell and the Online Distributed
- Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was
- produced from images generously made available by The Internet
- Archive)
-
-*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MACHINE-GUN TACTICS ***
-
-
-
-
- TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE
-
- Italic text is denoted by _underscores_.
-
- Footnote anchors are denoted by [number], and the footnotes have been
- placed at the end of the book.
-
- A superscript is denoted by ^, for example 15^x or 12^{th}.
-
- A subscript is denoted by _{x}, for example a_{2} or CHCl_{3}.
-
- Basic fractions are displayed as ½ ⅓ ¼ etc; other fractions are shown
- in the form a/b, for example 1/25.
-
- All changes noted in the ERRATA on page vii have been applied to the
- etext.
-
- Some minor changes to the text are noted at the end of the book.
-
-
-
-
- MACHINE-GUN TACTICS
-
-
- BY
-
- CAPTAIN R. V. K. APPLIN, D.S.O.
-
- 14th (King’s) Hussars
-
-
- LONDON
- HUGH REES, LTD., 119 PALL MALL, S.W.
- 1910
-
-
-
-
- PRINTED BY
- HAZELL, WATSON AND VINEY, LD.,
- LONDON AND AYLESBURY.
-
-
-
-
- PREFACE
-
-
-This book, which was begun five years ago, is now published because
-I feel that, with all its faults, it may bring into greater
-prominence the latent possibilities of the machine gun, and the
-vital necessity for the most complete organisation and tactical
-training of the detachments.
-
-I desire to express my great indebtedness to Captain C. O. Place,
-D.S.O., Royal Engineers, who undertook the work of editing and
-preparing the book for the press at a moment’s notice on my sailing
-for India.
-
- R. V. K. APPLIN.
-
- R.I.M.S. “NORTHBROOK,”
- _December 1st, 1909_.
-
-
-
-
- CONTENTS
-
-
- CHAP. PAGE
-
- I. DESCRIPTION AND ORGANISATION 1
-
- II. GENERAL PRINCIPLES 28
-
- III. WITH INDEPENDENT CAVALRY 57
-
- IV. WITH PROTECTIVE CAVALRY 86
-
- V. EMPLOYMENT WITH INFANTRY 105
-
- VI. EMPLOYMENT WITH INFANTRY (_cont._) 130
-
- VII. IN FORTRESS WARFARE 144
-
- VIII. IN MINOR OPERATIONS 161
-
- IX. MACHINE GUNS OF DIFFERENT COUNTRIES 187
-
-
-
-
- LIST OF PLATES AND DIAGRAMS
-
-
- FACING PAGE
-
- MACHINE GUN ON ADJUSTABLE TRIPOD BEHIND COVER.
- FRONT VIEW 224-5
-
- MACHINE GUN ON ADJUSTABLE TRIPOD BEHIND COVER.
- VIEW FROM REAR 224-5
-
- MAP OF PORT ARTHUR 266
-
- PAGE
-
- DIAGRAM TO SHOW THE ZONE BEATEN BY 50 PER CENT.
- OF BULLETS 5
-
- DIAGRAM TO SHOW THE DISPERSION OF BULLETS 6
-
- DIAGRAM TO SHOW FORMATION WHEN COMING INTO POSITION 39
-
- DIAGRAM TO SHOW METHOD OF LAYING BY AIMING POSTS 51
-
- DIAGRAM TO OBTAIN ANGLE OF SIGHT _m_ 53
-
- DIAGRAM OF JAPANESE MACHINE-GUN TRIPOD MOUNT 251
-
-
-
-
- ERRATA
-
-
- -----------------+-----+-----+--------------------------------------
- Error |Page |Line | Correction
- -----------------+-----+-----+--------------------------------------
- “firing” | 4 | 20 | finding
- “to” | 6 | 4 | delete
- “short” | 27 | 17 | shorter
- “25” | 35 | 20 | 125
- “G to O” | 53 | 9 | O to G;
- “VIII” | 65 | 26 | I
- “training” | 72 | 1 | turning
- “distance” | 116 | 5 | distant
- “work.” | 160 | 1 | works
- “the” | 163 | 2 | delete (_i.e._ “attack in mass”)
- “line” (omitted) | 177 | 27 | insert word “line” after “blockhouse”
- “portable” | 174 | 28 | potable
- (Sentence wrong) | 179 | 27 | “an event which has happened
- | | | almost every decade.”
- “1 ft.” | 196 | 22 | 1 ft. 6 in.
- “natural” | 221 | 5 | mutual
- “gear” | 226 | 15 | gun
- “ground” | ” | 19 | gun
- “screen” | 227 | 13 | screw
- “it placed” | 231 | 12 | is
- “attacked” | 238 | 8 | attached
- ·26 | 251 | 3 | ·256
- “strap” | 252 | 5 | strip
- ----------------+----+----+-----------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
-MACHINE-GUN TACTICS
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER I
-
-DESCRIPTION AND ORGANISATION
-
-
-The modern machine gun is essentially an automatic weapon of
-small-arm calibre, capable of firing from 100 to 600 shots a minute
-from a light mounting of extreme mobility, and should fulfil the
-following qualifications:
-
-1. It should be able to deliver about 400 shots a minute without
-loss of accuracy, even with prolonged “continuous” firing.
-
-2. It should be capable of accompanying cavalry and infantry
-wherever these arms can go; it should occupy the smallest space,
-and be able to come into action quickly at rifle range.
-
-3. It should have a firm mounting, upon which the gun is steady,
-and from which it can be aimed rapidly and fired while kneeling,
-sitting, or lying.
-
-4. The gun and its mounting must present a small target, and be
-light enough for each, and if possible, both, to be carried by one
-man for a considerable distance, and should admit of being dragged
-by a man crawling or crouching for short distances.
-
-5. It should be in constant readiness for action, and able when
-limbered up to open fire in less than thirty seconds.
-
-6. It should be simple, strong, and durable. Mobility and constant
-readiness for action are indispensable with cavalry, while
-lightness and smallness of target are essential factors.
-
-There are eight main types of machine guns at present in use in the
-armies of the world, viz.:
-
- Gun. In use in
- Maxim Great Britain, Germany, Russia, Italy, Portugal,
- Turkey, Switzerland, and U.S.A.
- Hotchkiss France, Japan, Belgium, Norway, Sweden,
- Spain, and Portugal.
- Perino Italy.
- Puteaux France.
- Schwarzlose Austria.
- Skoda Japan and China.
- Madsen Russia, Denmark (Rekyl pattern), and China
- (for cavalry).
- Colt By several countries in addition to adopted gun.
-
-The principal differences between these guns are: (_a_) The
-automatic mechanism. (_b_) Method of loading.
-
-(_a_) may be divided into two classes: 1. _Recoil action_--the
-Maxim, Perino, and the Madsen. 2. _Gas-pressure action_--the
-Schwarzlose, Hotchkiss, Skoda, and Colt.
-
-(_b_) consists of three classes: 1. _Belt loaders_--the Maxim,
-Schwarzlose, and Colt. 2. _Metal clip loaders_--Hotchkiss, Madsen,
-Perino, and Puteaux. 3. _Hopper loaders_--the Skoda.
-
-Several of the above countries--notably Russia, Japan, France, and
-Austria--have more than one pattern of gun in their service, and
-it is difficult to say which they intend finally to adopt; but
-Russia, since the war, has ordered several thousand Madsen guns,
-and Japan is said to be trying this gun, one of which during the
-war fired 25,000 shots in a single day.
-
-The Rexar gun has been purposely omitted; it only weighs 17½ lb.,
-but is fired from the shoulder, and is therefore more of the nature
-of an automatic rifle than a machine gun. It would take too long
-to deal with each of these weapons separately, therefore the Maxim
-has been selected as the type with which to discuss the question of
-tactics.
-
-In order thoroughly to understand the methods that should govern
-the tactical employment of machine guns, and their place in the
-battlefield, it is first necessary clearly to realise their nature
-and potentialities, and for this purpose we will examine their
-principal characteristics. Guns of this class are capable of firing
-service small-arm ammunition at the rate of 800 shots in one
-minute, but this very high rate of fire is obviously undesirable
-for several reasons--the principal, from a military point of view,
-being that, however skilfully the gun is handled, a great waste of
-ammunition must ensue, and hundreds of shots be wasted in space,
-however accurate the fire. These guns are, therefore, regulated
-to fire at a maximum rate of from 400 to 500 rounds a minute, or
-seven to eight shots a second, but even this is greater than is
-necessary to obtain the maximum fire effect; at ordinary targets
-100 to 250 rounds a minute, according to the nature of the target,
-has been found to give the best results in practice. The “rate of
-fire” of a gun must not be confused with the number of rounds that
-can be fired from it effectively in one minute; the necessity for
-frequent pauses to observe the effect, to correct the elevation and
-direction of the fire, prevent a greater number than from 150 to
-250 shots being fired effectively in one minute from a gun whose
-rate of fire is 450 shots a minute. Colonel Mayne, in his book _The
-Infantry Weapon and its Use in War_, says: “The machine gun now in
-use can fire about 600 rounds a minute, or ten a second. This is a
-far greater rapidity of fire than is really necessary, for it means
-that a man or horse is struck several times before falling. It is
-a good thing to be able to fire 600 rounds a minute on occasions
-(such as for range finding), but a far slower rate of fire (say 100
-rounds or even less a minute) is ample for all ordinary tactical
-purposes against living beings and animals, whilst causing an
-enormous saving of ammunition.”
-
-The extreme range of this type of gun is for all practical purposes
-the same as the infantry rifle--about 3,500 yards--though it is
-more effective at the longer ranges than an equal volume of rifle
-fire, owing to the ease with which the firer can elevate and aim
-the gun on its mountings and the stability of this mounting, which
-causes it to have a beaten zone of only half the depth and nearly
-half the width of that of infantry firing the same number of
-rounds. This has been proved again by actual experiment at the
-schools of musketry in England, India, and South Africa, while
-very elaborate experiments and trials carried out in Germany with
-the Maxim gun on the carriage adopted for that service proved that
-the beaten zone was only one-sixth of that obtained by infantry,
-probably because of the greater stability of their mounting.
-
-[Illustration: DIAGRAM I
-
-TO SHOW THE ZONE BEATEN BY 50 PER CENT. OF BULLETS]
-
-In order that “fire” may be “effective,” it is necessary to bring
-the enemy within the zone beaten by 75 per cent. of shots, and
-it has been found by experiment that 25 per cent. of shots fall
-immediately in front and behind the target, then 12½ per cent., 7½
-per cent., and, finally, 5 per cent. scattered far in front and
-behind.
-
-[Illustration: DIAGRAM II
-
-TO SHOW THE DISPERSION OF BULLETS]
-
-Infantry usually fire at the rate of three rounds a minute “slow,”
-and fifteen rounds a minute “rapid”; “slow” fire is the ordinary
-rate, and “rapid” fire can only be effectually maintained for about
-four minutes; but this is when the firer is fresh, and has not
-been subjected to several hours’ marching and fighting as would be
-the case in battle, and it is doubtful if “rapid” fire can be kept
-up on service for more than one-and-a-half to two minutes without
-becoming wild and consequently ineffective. On the other hand,
-“rapid” fire is less tiring to the machine gunner than “deliberate”
-fire; the gun is held for him by the mounting, it loads and fires
-itself, while elevation and direction are maintained without the
-least exertion on his part by the elevating and traversing gears.
-
-In comparing the volume of fire of the machine gun with that of a
-body of infantry, it is obvious that “rapid” cannot be taken as
-the normal rate of infantry fire, as it can only be used for the
-shortest periods, and even then it reduces the users to a state of
-inefficiency as regards accuracy in two or three minutes. On the
-other hand, “rapid” fire can only be used by the machine gunner on
-special occasions, for tactical reasons which will be explained
-later, so that it will be necessary to compare “slow” infantry fire
-with “deliberate” fire from the machine gun, in order to arrive at
-the mean fire volume of each. Seventy shots a minute can easily
-be fired “deliberately” from a machine gun, and this could be
-increased to 120 by highly trained gunners, but, taking the lower
-figure, deliberate fire equals in volume the fire of twenty-four
-men using rifles. But it must be always remembered that the object
-of the fire fight is to bring a concentrated and overwhelming
-fire to bear _at the right moment_ on certain positions of the
-enemy, and when the moment arrives machine guns can and will use
-the most rapid rate of fire possible, which will be from 250 to
-300 rounds a minute or equal to that of 50 or 100 riflemen. Mere
-volume of fire, however, is useless without control, accuracy, and
-concentration, and it is here that the machine gun is so vastly
-superior to the rifle; for amongst 50 men using their rifles there
-can only be a small percentage of good shots, while even among the
-good shots unforeseen factors, such as fatigue, bad fire positions,
-excitement, wrong sighting, failure to see the target, etc., cause
-a large percentage of the shots to go astray, and make it very
-difficult to concentrate the fire on any particular position of the
-enemy.
-
-An object-lesson to illustrate this superiority of the machine gun
-has been carried out during each course at the South African school
-of musketry under circumstances most favourable to the rifles.
-The record of one such test, carried out on September 21st, 1904,
-between a Maxim gun mounted on Mark III. tripod and 42 rifles
-(Lee Enfield), was published. The machine gun was worked by two
-sergeant-instructors, while the 42 rifles were fired by students
-who were all, at least, 1st Class shots before joining the school,
-and who for five weeks had been receiving daily instruction in
-musketry, and had just completed a course of firing both on the
-ranges (Table B) and in field-firing, and had gone through a course
-of judging distance. The range was unknown--the number of rounds
-unlimited, and the rate of fire “rapid.” The time was limited to
-one minute, and the firers were allowed to charge their magazines
-before starting. The targets were figures representing infantry in
-line extended to two paces. The following was the result:
-
- Rounds Figures Percentage
- fired. Hits. Percentage. hit. of loss.
- Rifles 408 62 15·1 27 54
- Maxim 228 69 30·2 32 64
-
-The small number of rounds fired by the Maxim was due to the
-necessity of picking up the range by firing small groups of five
-or ten shots and observing the strike of the bullets. What is
-most interesting is that although the rifles fired nearly twice
-as many shots as the machine gun, the latter made actually more
-hits, while the percentage of loss inflicted was 10 per cent.
-greater. The actual range was 1,000 yards. A similar experiment
-was carried out during the annual training for 1908 in the U.S.A.
-between 42 “sharpshooters” and a Maxim at the regulation “L”
-target. The ranges were 600, 800, 1,000 yards; the sharpshooters
-fired an average of 750 rounds at the three distances and made an
-average of 429 hits, which gave a collective figure of merit of
-59·09. The machine gun also fired 750 rounds, made 601 hits, giving
-a collective figure of merit of 79·54, being 22·45 in favour of
-the machine gun. The troops were armed with new rifles, and fired
-the new “S” bullet, while the machine gun used the old pattern
-ammunition and a barrel that had fired at least 7,000 shots. The
-gun squad had no previous practice at this target, and the gun was
-fired by different men at the several ranges. The collective fire
-of the troop was “slow aimed,” while the fire of the machine gun
-was “rapid continuous” for the number of rounds at each range. The
-machine gun took 30 seconds to fire 250 shots at each range, or a
-quarter that of the troop.[1]
-
-The two experiments are particularly interesting, as showing how
-closely the results agree, although the conditions are dissimilar
-in one respect: viz. that in the first case the number of rounds
-was unlimited and the result had to be obtained within one minute;
-while in the second case time was unlimited, but the number
-of rounds fired by each was the same. The result of the two
-experiments show that both in accuracy and rapidity a machine gun
-is much superior to 42 picked shots, whether firing the same number
-of rounds at known ranges or firing an unlimited number of shots in
-a given time at an unknown range. We shall not be wrong, then, if
-we say that a machine gun is at least equal to 50 rifles in fire
-value,[2] but there are other factors to be considered as well as
-fire effect in determining its tactical value, and it is in these
-other factors that machine guns are so far superior to riflemen
-as to make a reliable estimate of their relative value almost
-impossible; these factors are: (1) Mobility; (2) Visibility; (3)
-Vulnerability.
-
-_Mobility._--The mobility of the infantry soldier is limited to
-the rate at which he can march, which on the battlefield is
-about 100 yards a minute or less than three-and-a-half miles an
-hour. Doubling may be left out of the question, as it quickly
-reduces fire efficiency to a minimum. An experiment made in the
-Austrian Army showed that the percentage of hits which was 76·5 per
-cent. after an advance in quick time, fell to 51 per cent. after
-doubling.[3] The mobility of the machine gun will depend almost
-entirely on the way it is carried, and must not be judged by any
-particular carriage which may happen to be in use for the time
-being in our own service. A short description of these mountings
-and their method of transport will be found in Chapter IX., but
-none of them are entirely satisfactory.
-
-The infantry carriages are heavy, clumsy, and conspicuous, and
-are the least mobile of all; they can hardly be moved out of a
-walk without risk, and Marks III. and IV. cannot come into action
-without first unharnessing the mule or horse, and they then have to
-be dragged into position by the whole detachment--thus presenting
-a most conspicuous and vulnerable target at the moment when least
-desired and when concealment and invisibility are essential to
-tactical success.[4] In the German Official Account of the late
-Boer War, issued by the General Staff, is the following criticism
-of this carriage:
-
-“Both sides have machine guns, but the rather clumsy mountings
-of those used by the British offered too high a target, and so
-prevented their being advanced from position to position during the
-attack.”
-
-The tripod mounting, which is light and inconspicuous, is carried
-with the gun on a limbered wagon; but the advantages of its
-lightness and portability are almost neutralised by being carried
-on a wagon, thus reducing its mobility by confining it to ground
-suitable for wheeled vehicles.
-
-If used on a pack-saddle the difficulty of managing a led animal on
-foot in the stress of battle may become insuperable, and moving the
-gun in and out of action is entirely dependent on the docility of
-the pack-animal. The gun weighs anything from 40 to 60 lb., while
-the mountings need not weigh more than 34 lb. The combined weight
-of a gun and mounting should never exceed 120 lb. and can be as
-little as 74 lb.
-
-In whatever way it is decided to carry the gun, it is a _sine quâ
-non_ that it must be at least as mobile as horse artillery. There
-is no reason why it should not be as mobile as cavalry, and the
-choice remains between a pack-horse with a mounted detachment or
-a galloping carriage; and the former is in every way preferable,
-principally because it can carry the gun and ammunition across any
-country, and can come into action in less than 30 seconds on an
-adjustable tripod, which can be carried by hand into any position
-and presents a very small, inconspicuous target.
-
-The majority of foreign countries have adopted pack transport for
-their machine guns. It is desirable with infantry and absolutely
-essential with cavalry. A suitable saddle is, of course,
-indispensable, and strong spiral springs to the hooks which hold
-the gun and tripod on either side will entirely prevent horses from
-straining their backs when galloping across country or jumping
-obstacles with the guns. These hooks must be leather-covered and
-made to fit the gun exactly, and, in order to do away with the
-present cumbersome straps and buckles, they should have a hinged
-attachment to close over the gun and lock automatically in such a
-way as to admit of its being opened by a single movement when it
-is required to dismount the gun. The Swiss and the Americans have
-permanently adopted pack transport for the machine guns with their
-cavalry, which are able to accompany them over any country without
-detriment to either horses or guns; and in the American army the
-average time for a well-trained cavalry machine-gun detachment to
-go into action front, from mounted formation, unpack, and set up
-the guns, load, aim, and open fire, is 25 seconds; while at the
-departmental meeting for 1908 the machine guns of the 10th Cavalry,
-from the halt in line, _moved forward in section column at a gallop
-for 200 yards and went into action and fired a blank shot in 31
-seconds_.[5]
-
-This brings us to the second factor--_Visibility_. It is
-absolutely necessary for the successful tactical employment of
-machine guns that they should be as inconspicuous as possible
-when in action; the gun itself is a very small object when close
-to the ground, and its visibility will depend almost entirely on
-the nature of mounting and its adaptability for use behind cover
-of varying heights. All our infantry carriages are so conspicuous
-as to be quite unconcealable except in defence, the wheels being
-4 ft. 8 in. in diameter and the gun axis 3 ft. 6 in. above the
-ground. The Mark IV. tripod is the handiest and least conspicuous
-of the mountings at present in use in our service, and although it
-weighs 48 lb. it can be carried into almost any position and easily
-concealed. It can be adjusted to fire at any desired height between
-14½ and 30 in. above the ground level, and consequently can be used
-from behind any suitable cover.
-
-_Vulnerability._--The question of vulnerability would appear at
-first to depend entirely on visibility; or, in other words, on
-the target presented to the enemy’s fire, but this is only true
-to a certain extent. To obtain the minimum vulnerability it is
-of course necessary to have the gun as low and inconspicuous as
-possible, because the less it can be seen and the better cover it
-can obtain, the more difficult it will be to locate and hit. But
-the true vulnerability of the gun in comparison with infantry lies
-in the amount of front they occupy respectively; or in other words,
-the breadth of the target exposed to the enemy and the percentage
-of loss they can each sustain _without their fire effect being
-reduced_. Infantry will never again fight in two ranks in civilised
-warfare, and the closest formation possible for a firing line is
-one pace per man; 50 men will therefore occupy a front of, roughly,
-50 yards; in other words, the target presented to the enemy is 50
-yards in breadth, and, provided the elevation is correct, shots
-striking anywhere within this 50 yards will be effective. The
-machine gun, however, only occupies a front of from 4 ft. to 5
-ft. 2 in., or 1/25th _the front offered by infantry having equal
-fire effect_. It is on this point that the wonderful tactical
-possibilities of the machine gun rests: _the maximum of rifle
-fire from the minimum of front_. It is obvious that 10 per cent.
-of casualties in the infantry firing line reduce the fire effect
-by just that amount, while from 30 to 40 per cent. will probably
-silence its fire altogether or render it ineffective. The machine
-gun, on the other hand, is unaffected by even 50 per cent. of loss,
-while it can suffer 80 per cent. of loss without diminishing its
-fire effect, though such a loss would of course cause it to lose
-its mobility and seriously affect the morale of the gunners. A
-machine-gun detachment consists of from 16 to 24 men, but only two
-of them actually work the gun, and one man alone can fire the gun
-once it is in action, the second man merely assisting him with the
-ammunition, etc., but he is not absolutely necessary to the firing
-of the gun. Thus we see that the killing of the gunner only causes
-a momentary cessation of fire until another man takes his place,
-when the fire is resumed without loss of intensity, accuracy, or
-concentration.
-
-We are now in a position to form an accurate estimate of the
-potentialities of the machine gun and its true tactical value as
-compared with infantry, and we find:
-
- 1. Its fire effect 50 rifles at least.
- 2. Its mobility Cavalry.
- 3. Its visibility A file (2 men).
- 4. Its vulnerability Unaffected by 50% of loss.
-
-Before discussing their place in battle and tactical use it will
-be necessary to say a few words on the best methods of grouping
-the guns and organising their detachments and the training of the
-personnel in peace for the duties they will have to perform in war.
-In our service two machine guns are issued to each regiment of
-cavalry and battalion of infantry, and the detachment consists of:
-
- Cavalry. Infantry.
- Subaltern 1 1
- Sergeant 1 1
- Corporal 1 1
- Privates 12 12
- Drivers 8 2
- Bâtmen 2 -
- -- --
- 25 (1 officer) 17 (1 officer)
-
-This section of two guns is therefore the smallest tactical
-unit, and the officer in command is solely responsible for the
-training and efficiency of his section. It is therefore absolutely
-essential that the machine-gun section commander should be a
-subaltern of not less than three years’ service, specially selected
-for his keenness, efficiency, and self-reliance, who has passed
-the examination “C” for promotion, and who holds the special
-machine-gun certificate from a School of Musketry. A “destroyer”
-in the Royal Navy is commanded by a very junior officer, but he is
-most carefully selected for similar qualities to those mentioned,
-and is in addition required to possess the necessary professional
-qualifications--consequently it is a command much sought after,
-and competition enables the authorities to appoint the pick of the
-service and thus obtain the maximum efficiency where efficiency is
-the essence of successful employment in war. The best and nothing
-but the best is necessary to the successful employment of machine
-guns, and the importance of obtaining the very best officers as
-section commanders is so great that there is reason to doubt the
-utility of having machine guns at all if they are not commanded and
-handled by those who are in every way expert in their use.
-
-In order to enable machine-gun sections to be trained in tactics
-and to co-operate with larger units in war, it is essential that
-they should be trained under a senior officer during peace. The
-late Colonel Henderson said of the Volunteers in Mexico: “The
-ideal of the battle is a combined effort directed by a well-trained
-leader: as individuals they fought well; as organised bodies
-capable of manœuvring under fire and of combined effort, they
-proved to be comparatively worthless.” This is precisely the case
-of regimental machine guns. It is easy enough to use a section or
-even a single gun apart from its battery should occasion require,
-but it is impossible to improvise a battery from a number of
-separate sections. It is therefore essential before attempting the
-tactical training of machine guns, much less their tactical use,
-to organise them in batteries during peace. For this purpose it is
-suggested that when a battalion is brigaded with others, either
-for administration or training, the six or eight guns should be
-formed into one or two batteries, under a selected field officer,
-who would be solely responsible for their peace training and
-tactical efficiency, and who would command them on manœuvres and
-on service. There would be little or no innovation in this, as
-our regimental signallers are at present trained and commanded on
-similar lines under the divisional signalling officer. A cavalry
-brigade under the present organisation (1909) would have one
-battery of six guns, and an infantry brigade two batteries of four
-guns each. The batteries of a Division would be commanded by the
-divisional machine-gun commander. While such organisation would in
-no way prevent the regimental machine-gun section being used with
-its own unit as at present, it would ensure a very high standard
-of tactical training, and enable the Divisional General to have a
-splendid reserve in his own hands for use at the critical moment of
-the fight as mobile as cavalry, in fire action more powerful than
-infantry, occupying the smallest possible front, yet capable of
-delivering a storm of some 10,000 bullets a minute with the maximum
-of accuracy and concentration.
-
-The tactics in this book are based on the understanding that the
-machine guns are trained on this system, and that they are mounted
-on light, adjustable tripods and carried on trained pack-horses
-with the entire detachment mounted.
-
-The failure of machine guns is due to two principal causes: (1)
-Insufficient training in working the guns. (2) Improper tactical
-employment.
-
-It will be obvious that unless the gun can be depended upon to open
-fire with certainty and accuracy, and maintain it continuously
-without jamming or mechanical failure, it is useless to consider
-its tactical employment. The mechanism of the Maxim is somewhat
-complicated and delicate, and depends for its proper working
-upon the exact adjustment of each part; but no more so than any
-other piece of modern machinery--it is far less complicated and
-certainly far less delicate than the modern motor-car. Indeed,
-the comparison is analogous in several respects, as both require
-highly trained operators to ensure their smooth and continuous
-working, and each individual machine, whether gun or motor, has
-its own peculiarities and requires special study to obtain the best
-results. Both are capable of hard and constant employment for long
-periods, without breakdown or failure, in the hands of an expert.
-
-No one would think for one moment of engaging a chauffeur for a
-high-class motor-car who had less than six months’ training and
-experience, and who was not capable of stripping and adjusting
-the motors and effecting minor repairs. It would be difficult to
-find a machine-gun detachment with a single man who possessed even
-these minimum qualifications. Apart from the mechanical knowledge
-it must be remembered that the man who fires the gun, known as No.
-I. in our service, has in his own hands the fire from 50 rifles,
-and on his own judgment and skill as a shot will entirely depend
-the effectiveness or otherwise of this fire; it stands to reason
-therefore that he should be chosen primarily for his good shooting,
-but, in addition to his skill in aiming, he must be a good judge
-of distance and possess considerable intelligence, initiative, and
-self-reliance; for although he will usually receive orders as to
-target, range, rate of fire, and the moment for opening or ceasing
-fire, it will often happen that he has to use his own judgment in
-these very important matters.
-
-As the gun is generally required to move and come into action
-independently of other troops, it must find its own scouts, who not
-only have to safeguard it from surprise when moving, but must be
-trained to select good positions whence it can come into action.
-For this reason the men of the detachment must be trained scouts.
-
-To summarise:
-
-(1) Only marksmen should be chosen.
-
-(2) Trained scouts should be given the preference.
-
-(3) The whole detachment must be trained as range-finders and
-scouts.
-
-(4) The whole detachment must be proficient in judging distance.
-
-(5) Only strong men should be selected.
-
-The strength of a machine-gun detachment is given in Chapter IX.
-With the tripod mountings and pack transport the best _working_
-strength for a machine-gun section will be found to be the
-following:--
-
-1 officer, 1 sergeant, 2 corporals, and 20 privates--that is, 1
-N.C.O. and 10 men to each gun. It is almost superfluous to say that
-the whole detachment must be trained to work and fire the gun, and
-should have a very thorough knowledge of its parts and mechanism,
-and be experts at remedying failures and effecting minor repairs.
-Until the whole detachment are so trained and can detect the cause
-of any failure instantly and remedy the same in the minimum time
-required, it is useless to attempt tactical training in the field.
-The preliminary training will take from three to six months,
-according to the ability of the instructor and the time available
-daily for work.
-
-It will be found that certain men of the detachment are far more
-skilful in laying and firing the gun than others, and it is
-undoubtedly sound to specially train these men as gun-layers and to
-permanently allot to the two best layers the duties of Nos. 1 and
-2 (_i.e._ the firer and his assistant). This should be the post of
-honour and coveted accordingly, and the two best gun-layers should
-be awarded a distinguishing badge. As no badge is authorised by our
-regulations, a lance stripe might be given to the best No. 1 of
-each gun.
-
-In training the men of the section in the preliminary details
-of working the guns, the following points may be found of use.
-First frame a course of instruction for each day which will give
-systematic and progressive individual instruction in the following
-points: mechanism, name and use of every part, the working of the
-mechanism, care of gun, stripping and fitting, loading and firing;
-spare-part box, the name of each of its contents and recognition of
-every part _when out of the box_; failures, their recognition and
-remedy; gun-laying and firing, co-operation between layer, loader,
-and observer. This course should last at least three months,
-provided not less than two hours a day are available. Drills may
-be combined with preliminary instruction at the end of the first
-month, and must aim at extreme quickness in dismounting the gun
-and opening _aimed_ fire and remounting the gun again. The chief
-points in the preliminary training are that _all_ the detachment
-are _equally_ instructed. Training on the 20-yard range in barracks
-should take place during the third month, and special targets
-should be used to teach laying the gun, slow use of elevating
-gear and combined sights, traversing fire, fire control, rapid
-change of target, indirect fire. During this short-range practice
-the failures should be practically demonstrated, and firing on
-the range should never take place without making a few artificial
-failures to test the efficiency of the detachment. These failures
-should be introduced by the officer himself without the knowledge
-of the detachment, and should be so arranged as to occur naturally
-while firing. They should be timed by him in each case, and the
-record time for the remedy of each failure posted up in the
-barrack-room with the man’s name. Artificial failures can easily
-be made by filing round the base of a cartridge so that it is torn
-off when fired; by loosening a bullet in a cartridge, by slightly
-flattening a cartridge so as to cause it to jam in the chamber, by
-wedging a cartridge in the belt, by introducing a blank cartridge,
-and by repacking the asbestos with dry packing. It will be found
-that by making two or three such jams every time the gun is taken
-out to fire the detachment will soon become expert in recognising
-and remedying failures.
-
-The men should be taught that failures may be divided into two
-classes, viz. _avoidable_ and _unavoidable_. The occurrence of
-an avoidable failure should be looked upon as a disgrace to the
-firer. The _unavoidable_ failures so seldom occur that they are
-negligible.
-
-The _avoidable_ failures are those due to (1) Fuzee spring
-adjustment. (2) Want of oil. (3) Dirt. (4) Want of water. (5) Bad
-packing. (6) Damaged ammunition. (7) Faults in feed due to badly
-filled, new, or damaged belts. Each machine gun will be found to
-work best with a certain weight of fuzee spring which can only
-be found by trial, and this weight will change from time to time
-as the gun wears. The machine gunner cannot be considered fit
-for further training until he has become so familiar with his
-gun that he can instantly tell by the sound if it is working at
-its best; just as a chauffeur knows at once if his engines are
-running perfectly, and can instantly detect the slightest defect
-and make the necessary adjustment of the spark, petrol, or oil
-to ensure smooth running. The unavoidable failures are so few
-and rare that they will seldom be met with, and can be quickly
-remedied, except the breaking of an important part. Failures due
-to defective ammunition are extremely rare provided ordinary
-precautions are taken to avoid placing damaged cartridges in the
-belt. A breakage in any part of the lock can be remedied in a
-few seconds by substituting the spare lock which should always
-be _on the gun_ in action. The breaking of any other part of the
-gun will be an accident of rare occurrence and, provided the gun
-is properly inspected before use, may be more properly classified
-under accidents than failures. A modern machine gun in the hands
-of experts should never jam, while failure of automatic fire will
-be rare and momentary. Until this standard has been reached a
-machine-gun detachment cannot be considered fit to begin tactical
-training. The Japanese in the late war were obliged to improvise
-the detachments for their hastily acquired machine guns; and
-Captain Matsuda, who commanded the machine guns with Prince Kanin’s
-Cavalry Brigade, says: “Whereas at the battle of Peu-si-lau on
-October 12th we had some trouble after firing 1,800 rounds, on
-March 3rd the guns of one section after firing 11,000 rounds
-continued to work perfectly. _The gunners were absolutely familiar
-with their weapons._” Lieut.-General Sir C. J. Burnett, K.C.B.,
-remarked: “Like a good chauffeur, the Japanese machine gunner knows
-all the peculiarities of the weapon he fires and can tell almost by
-instinct when anything is going wrong.” It is almost superfluous
-to say that the men of the machine-gun detachment must never be
-changed or taken for any other work. Nothing has been said of the
-necessity for training the detachment in the all-important duties
-of scouting, range-taking, and horsemastership during this period,
-but of course they are vital to ultimate success and must not be
-neglected.
-
-Range practices will follow, and the peculiarities of the gun
-and its fire effect must be carefully taught during this period.
-The use of traversing and sweeping fire, combined sights, and
-observation of fire and the use of deliberate fire in imitation
-of rifle fire should be perfected during range practice, so that
-they may be carried out under service conditions during the field
-practices which follow.
-
-The tactical training should commence as soon as the field
-practices have been completed. The course for this should be
-carefully mapped out beforehand and should be based upon the
-principles given in Chapter II. and in the chapter dealing with
-the arm to which the section belongs, and should culminate in
-divisional manœuvres. This course might follow the following
-headings:
-
-(1) Drill over rough country.
-
-(2) Selecting a position.
-
-(3) Selecting alternate positions.
-
-(4) Taking up a position.
-
-(5) Screening guns.
-
-(6) Making artificial cover.
-
-(7) Mutual support (movement and fire).
-
-(8) Indirect fire.
-
-(9) A battery working on a wide front in mutual support.
-
-No drill for a battery has been authorised yet (1909), but the
-simple formations of a troop as laid down in _Cavalry Training_
-will be found admirably suited for a battery of machine guns on
-pack-horses with mounted detachment.
-
-The writer is fully aware of the condition under which machine guns
-are officered and manned at present, and that a great error has
-been made in estimating the time required to train the detachments.
-The Germans, who have studied the question of machine guns with a
-thoroughness far greater than that of any other nation, have made
-them a separate arm of their service, under trained and permanent
-gunners, and they evidently consider that only specialists can
-attain the necessary efficiency.
-
-However this may be, it is certain that the officer, whether
-commanding a section or the batteries of a Division, must be a
-specialist and a highly trained one.
-
-An officer commanding a company of Russian machine guns in the
-Russo-Japanese War, writing his experiences to the _Nouskin
-Invalid_, says:
-
-“I have spent three years in studying machine guns, and consider
-myself proficient in their use, but I have always been convinced
-that the requisite skill and knowledge cannot be acquired in a
-shorter time.”
-
-The commanding officer who at present looks upon his machine
-guns in much the same light as he regards any other portion of
-his first-line transport--a necessary encumbrance taking away an
-officer and several men from their proper duties, and a source of
-anxiety when the regiment goes into action--would regard them with
-very different feelings if assured of their efficiency and relieved
-of the responsibility for their tactics and safety. That this is
-possible without altering the present organisation has been shown;
-that it is absolutely essential for their efficient use in war it
-is hoped to demonstrate in the chapters that follow.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER II
-
-GENERAL PRINCIPLES
-
-
-“Each arm has its special characteristics and functions, and is
-dependent on the assistance of others; the full power of an army
-can be exerted only when all its parts act in close combination,
-and this is not possible unless the members of each arm understand
-the characteristics of the other arms.”
-
-The above paragraph from _Field Service Regulations_, Part I.,
-1909, aptly illustrates a principle which should be impressed
-upon every serious machine-gun student, for the principles of
-machine-gun tactics are based upon those of the arm with which they
-are co-operating.
-
-The machine gun cannot yet be regarded as a separate “arm” in our
-service, nevertheless it possesses a power peculiar to itself;
-and until this power is studied and thoroughly understood, the
-principles that should govern its employment in the field cannot be
-grasped, and consequently its effective use is dependent on chance
-or accident, and for every success scored a dozen failures will
-occur, any one of which may be fatal. The preceding chapter has
-dealt with the peculiarities and power of the machine gun, and it
-will be seen that it possesses the fire effect of the infantry arm
-while it has several of the characteristics peculiar to artillery;
-for instance, it is fired from a mounting by one man, and is moved
-from position to position by draught or pack animals.
-
-We have seen that the chief characteristic of the machine gun is
-its power of delivering the “maximum fire from the minimum front”;
-this fire is of great volume and is highly concentrated, while it
-can also be made to sweep a wide lateral surface of ground. The
-gun’s narrow frontage in action renders it easy to conceal, and
-when discovered it presents a very small and difficult target to
-the enemy’s riflemen; on the other hand, when once discovered if it
-cannot be moved unseen to another position it is liable to suffer a
-prolonged and concentrated fire from the widely scattered riflemen
-of the enemy, to which it cannot effectively reply, and which must
-in time cause loss. Again, its range being limited, it is powerless
-against artillery except under special circumstances at effective
-rifle range.
-
-The general principles governing its tactical employment depend
-upon three factors, viz. (1) the target, (2) the range, (3) the
-position.
-
-The volume and concentration of its fire necessitate a large
-and vulnerable target, or ammunition will be expended without
-adequate results. The first essential is therefore to obtain this
-description of target and to avoid firing on others which may
-present themselves.
-
-A large and deep target might justify fire being opened at long
-range, but such targets rarely present themselves on the modern
-battlefield, and its vulnerability will partly depend on the
-closeness of the range and partly on its formation. To obtain a
-suitable target of this description _surprise_ is essential, and to
-effect a surprise it will be necessary to conceal the gun and its
-detachment in a well-chosen position.
-
-Thus we see the three cardinal points for tactical success
-are--suitable _target_ at close _range_ from a concealed _position_.
-
-
-FIRE EFFECT
-
-Napoleon’s maxim, that “fire is everything--the rest is of small
-account,” is only applicable to the machine gun when the fire is
-_effective_. Nothing is so useless and wasteful as ineffective
-machine-gun fire, and the careful study of fire effect and how
-to obtain the best results is imperative with this weapon. The
-principles so ably stated in Colonel Mayne’s excellent book, _The
-Infantry Weapon and its Use in War_, apply almost equally to
-machine guns, and should be carefully studied by machine gunners,
-particularly those chapters dealing with the employment of fire in
-the field.
-
-We have already seen that the range of the machine gun is
-practically the same as that of the infantry rifle, but that the
-beaten zone is only half the depth and about half the width of the
-collective fire of infantry, partly owing to the rigidity of the
-mounting, and partly to the fact that the human error is greatly
-reduced by being concentrated in the person of a single individual,
-instead of being spread over some 50 men of varying temperament,
-nerves, and aiming powers.
-
-In addition to these factors, the fire from machine guns is always
-“collective” and “concentrated” unless deliberately dispersed
-by the firer, while infantry fire is always “individual” and
-“dispersed” unless controlled by fire discipline under a leader.
-Fire discipline and fire control are in the hands of one man--there
-is no need to point out the target to a scattered firing line,
-and there is no delay in passing orders down the line, or in the
-setting of 50 different sights for the correct elevation. Thus fire
-can be opened far more rapidly and accurately than with rifles, and
-can be at once directed on a fresh target without ceasing fire,
-while the effect can be seen by the firer, who can instantly change
-the rate or cease fire altogether.
-
-The beaten zone is perhaps the most important factor in obtaining
-effective fire, and the following table, compiled from _Musketry
-Regulations_, 1909, gives the zone beaten by 75 per cent. at four
-ranges.
-
-
- RANGES
-
- ------------------+--------------------------------------------------
- | Zone containing 75 per cent. of shots
- | (effective zone).
- +-----------+------------+------------+------------
- | 500 yards.|1,000 yards.|1,500 yards.|2,000 yards.
- ------------------+-----------+------------+------------+------------
- Depth | 150 yds. | 70 yds. | 60 yds. | 50 yds.
- Lateral Dispersion| 4 ft. | 8 ft. | 13 ft. | 19 ft.
- ------------------+-----------+------------+------------+------------
-
-It will be seen that the 75 per cent., or effective zone, is
-deepest at 500 yards, and gradually decreases as the range
-increases up to 2,000 yards; beyond this distance it increases
-again in about the same ratio up to 3,000 yards.
-
-The following formula will give the effective zone (75 per cent. of
-shots) approximately for all ranges up to 1,500 yards inclusive:
-50,000/Range + 20. Example for 1,000 yards: 50,000/1,000 + 20 =
-70 yards, which is the depth of the area swept by 75 per cent. of
-shots, or the “effective” beaten zone. For ranges beyond 1,500
-yards this formula is useless, and after 2,000 the beaten zone
-increases in depth, while the angle of descent of the bullets
-becomes so steep that the “dangerous space” is reduced to a
-minimum; and consequently the zone beaten by 75 per cent. of shots
-is no longer the “effective zone,” and it will be necessary to
-get the target within the zone beaten by the nucleus, or 50 per
-cent. of the shots. This zone at 2,500 yards range is about 50
-yards in depth, so an error in estimating the range of more than
-25 yards over or under the correct distance will render the fire
-“ineffective.” Even at 1,500 yards the “effective zone” (75 per
-cent.) is but 60 yards deep, which only allows an error of 30 yards
-over or under the correct range--a very small margin, even when
-using a range-finding instrument, but without an instrument it is
-obviously impossible to “estimate” or “judge” the distance with
-sufficient accuracy to ensure bringing the “effective zone” on the
-target.
-
-For ranges over 500 yards it is absolutely necessary to know the
-range accurately or to find some other method of bringing the
-“effective zone” on to the target.
-
-The machine gunner may be likened to the fireman with his
-hose-pipe, whose object is to bring the base of his jet of water to
-play on a certain spot some distance away from the nozzle of his
-pipe. He does not trouble about the distance, he does not require
-to know the range; but pointing the nozzle in the direction of the
-spot he desires to strike, he elevates or depresses it until he
-observes the base of the cone of water falling on the right spot,
-and then he holds his pipe so that it continues to fall where he
-desires; he does not trouble about the smaller streams and drops of
-water that fall short or go beyond, but devotes his whole attention
-to keeping the nucleus of the stream--the 75 per cent. or 50 per
-cent. zone--falling on his “target.” In precisely the same way the
-machine gunner must look upon his stream of bullets as a stream of
-water from a hose-pipe, and his object must be to cause the centre
-of that stream to play on the target, or, in other words, to bring
-the effective cone of fire on the target so that it is the centre
-of the beaten zone. This can be done by “observing” the strike of
-the nucleus of the shots and altering the elevation accordingly.
-On favourable ground fire can be observed by No. 1 up to 800
-yards, but No. 2 with the aid of good glasses can observe fire on
-favourable ground up to 1,500. This observation of fire is the best
-method of obtaining the correct elevation at “effective” ranges
-(_i.e._ 1,400 to 600), if the ground is suitable. The procedure
-should be as follows: The range should be “estimated” by No. 1, who
-should then adjust his sight for 100 or 200 yards less elevation
-than the supposed distance, and fire “groups” of 8 or 10 shots; No.
-2 observing the strike of the bullets and saying “short” or “over,”
-as the case may be, while No. 1 alters the elevation between each
-group until No. 2 says “on,” when fire may be continued, still
-observed by No. 2, until the desired effect has been attained. No.
-1 must be careful to fire his first group of shots short of the
-target, as they are much easier to locate than shots which fall
-“over.”
-
-If the target is only visible for a short time, the groups may
-be “rapid,” but as a rule “deliberate” fire at the quickest rate
-should be used, and “rapid” only used when the range has been
-found. If the ground is not favourable for the observation of fire,
-or the range is too great, this method cannot be used, and it will
-be necessary to obtain the range by instruments; but it will not
-always be possible to do so, and it is necessary to find some other
-reliable way of ensuring that the target is within the “effective”
-zone.
-
-Supposing the range to be estimated at 1,400 yards, the effective
-zone is about 60 yards in depth--therefore an error of only 30
-yards in estimating the range can be permitted. There is but one
-way to overcome the difficulty, and that is by _increasing_ the
-effective zone; and this can be done by using “combined sights,”
-thus making two or more beaten zones which touch each other and
-overlap where the effective 75 per cent. of shots of both ends.
-
-There are two ways of using combined sights:
-
-(_a_) The “single gun” method.
-
-(_b_) The “battery” method.
-
-In (_a_), with an estimated range of 1,400 yards, the sights will
-be set for 1,300 and aim taken; then the sights will be again
-set for 1,500 yards, but without altering the original aim, and
-then “rapid” fire opened and the elevating wheel slowly turned to
-elevate the gun until the 1,500 yards sighting is aligned on the
-target. The result of this operation is to sweep the whole ground
-from 1,270 to 1,530 yards with effective fire; and if an error
-of 125 yards over or under the correct range has been made, the
-target is nevertheless brought within the effective zone by the
-combined elevations used. This is the best method for sections or
-single guns, and a section can vary this by one gun using 1,250
-yards elevation and working up to 1,400, while the other gun begins
-at 1,350 and works up to 1,550. The choice of the amount over and
-under the estimated range must depend upon the ability of the
-person estimating the range and circumstances of the case, but less
-than 100 yards over or under should never be used.
-
-The second method (_b_) is only used where at least four guns are
-available, and requires six guns to obtain the best results. The
-range is estimated as before, and then each gun uses an elevation
-differing by 25 yards from the next: thus, taking 1,400 yards again
-as an example of the estimated distance, No. 1 gun will use 1,300;
-No. 2, 1,325; No. 3, 1,350, and so on, No. 6 using 1,425 yards.
-
-In this way the effective zone of No. 1 gun, which is 60 yards in
-depth, will just overlap the effective zone of No. 2 gun, and so
-on right up to No. 6 gun. Thus instead of one small zone of 60
-yards of effective fire, we have six guns joining to make one big
-effective zone 185 yards deep.
-
-Care must be taken not to use more than 25 yards between sights at
-ranges over 1,400 yards, otherwise there will be gaps between each
-effective zone, and the fire would be ineffective should the target
-happen to be at a spot between any two zones.
-
-The methods of firing the gun are laid down in the official
-Handbook, but it may be added that in using “deliberate” fire the
-double button should be pressed irregularly so as to imitate rifle
-fire, and with a little practice a rate of 120 shots a minute can
-easily be attained.
-
-This kind of fire, although it should seldom be used, will
-occasionally be serviceable in ranging for observation when it
-is desired to do away with the peculiar sound of the machine gun
-and thus not disclose its presence prematurely. In covering a
-retirement it may also be found useful to deceive the enemy into
-believing they are only opposed by riflemen, while reserving its
-full fire power until a good target presents itself at close range.
-
-“_Continuous_” fire should be used in “gusts” or bursts of from 15
-to 30 shots, a momentary pause being made to observe the effect,
-and, if necessary, to correct the aim. The great expenditure
-of ammunition caused by “continuous” fire renders its use only
-justified when the effect obtained is commensurate, and it should
-seldom be adopted until the circumstances justify it. But when a
-really good target is found at close range, the ammunition need no
-longer be considered until there is nothing left alive to fire at.
-Annihilation should always be the final aim of machine-gun fire.
-
-
-TAKING UP A POSITION
-
-Except under special circumstances, such as for covering fire or
-a demonstration, the battery will not move as such into position,
-but each section will be given its approximate place and move there
-independently, keeping touch, however, by signal or connecting
-files with the battery commander and acting in close co-operation
-with the other sections.
-
-Positions are of two kinds, viz. (1) positions of observation, (2)
-positions of readiness.
-
-The position of observation will usually precede the position of
-readiness, and the principal points are the concealment of the guns
-and detachments, the facilities for observing the enemy and for
-movement in any direction.
-
-The position of readiness will be in the immediate vicinity of the
-fire positions, and the guns may be actually in position awaiting
-the target.
-
-When moving alone on the march, scouts working in pairs must be
-pushed well out ahead and on the exposed flank or flanks, and
-they should be trained to use a system of signals to indicate the
-following: (1) “All clear”; (2) “Enemy in sight”; (3) “A good
-target in sight”; (4) “Cavalry” (prepare for); (5) “Artillery
-within range”; (6) “A good gun position.”
-
-Six simple and unmistakable signals can easily be arranged and
-learned during peace training, which might prove invaluable in
-war, for “opportunity” is everything to the machine gunner, and
-is usually so fleeting as to demand instant action in order to
-obtain success. On moving to occupy a position as a battery, the
-guns will usually be in line at from 10 to 100 yards interval, with
-the section commanders leading their sections and the scouts well
-ahead; the flank guns must arrange for the protection of the flanks
-by scouts in the same manner.
-
-[Illustration: DIAGRAM III
-
-TO SHOW FORMATION WHEN COMING INTO POSITION
-
- aaa. The Position. B. Ground Scouts. C. Battery Commander.
- D. Connecting files. E. Section Commanders. ee. Flankers.
- F. Guns & Detachments.]
-
-The Germans consider that ground scouts should never go into the
-proposed position, as they are likely to expose themselves to
-the enemy, and thus “give the position away,” and, as already
-pointed out, “surprise” is the essence of success. They say that
-the commander of the battery or section, whichever the unit may
-be, should alone examine the position and select the place for
-his battery or section to come into action--and this is the right
-method as a general principle; but in broken or hilly country,
-where cover is abundant, and where the position is extensive, a
-battery commander can do no more than indicate generally the
-positions to be occupied by the sections, and it will then be
-advisable for the section commanders to personally select the
-positions for their guns. If the cover is good, the range-finders
-may next occupy the gun positions and proceed to take ranges. They
-must be most careful not to show themselves in the least and should
-work from cover to cover, some distance from the gun positions
-and not on the same alignment. The ranges must be noted on proper
-range cards, and when complete sent to the section commanders.
-In open country, where there is no good cover in the position,
-the scouts will only approach it sufficiently to ensure that it
-is not occupied by the enemy, and will then halt and find a good
-position for the guns to be dismounted; the commander, passing
-through the scouts, will then reconnoitre the position himself,
-and select the place for coming into action. There are two methods
-of taking up a position, which depend for their choice upon the
-proximity of the enemy and the time at which fire is to be opened.
-The first is the “deliberate” method, when the guns are brought
-up and the range taken before the target appears. In this case
-cover is essential to success, and the guns must be most carefully
-concealed, the whole object being to surprise the enemy when the
-moment arrives, and thus concealment is of the first importance.
-The second method is used when the enemy is in the immediate
-vicinity, when the country is open and the position without cover,
-or when the position is within artillery range of the enemy. The
-guns unlimber and prepare for action immediately in rear of the
-gun positions, and as close to them as possible and completely out
-of sight of the enemy. The commander alone goes into the position,
-and having selected approximately where each gun is to go, he
-stations them immediately in rear of their intended places out of
-sight and then creeps into the position himself and watches for
-the opportune moment; when this arrives, a blast on his whistle
-brings the guns up with a rush, no concealment is attempted, but,
-fully exposed, each gun opens fire on the nearest target. If the
-moment has been rightly judged and the range properly estimated,
-60 to 90 seconds is sufficient time to obtain the desired effect,
-and before the enemy’s artillery can get the range a second signal
-from the commander sends the guns out of action again as rapidly
-as they appeared. This is one of the most successful methods of
-employing machine guns: there is no risk of being seen before the
-target appears, there is no “giving away the position” by careless
-scouts, and there is no chance that a powerful pair of glasses will
-discover the guns in position before they open fire and turn the
-tables by surprising them instead. On the other hand, it requires
-very highly trained detachments and a vast amount of peace practice
-to ensure its success in war.
-
-Alternative positions are always necessary when the deliberate
-method is used, and must be carefully practised in peace--the
-principal points to be observed being: (1) That the second
-position is suitable for bringing effective fire to bear on the
-enemy, and (2) that the gun is able to gain the position without
-exposure.
-
-Scouts so often forget that they can work with ease where it is
-impossible to carry a gun; and unless the above conditions are
-fulfilled, the alternative position will be useless.
-
-The place for dismounting the guns must always be as close to the
-fire position as possible without exposing the teams to fire or
-view; the reserve ammunition must be brought up to this spot, and
-precautions must be taken to prevent the teams being surprised
-from the flanks or rear if exposed. Machine guns should never be
-advanced for a short distance. If it is desired to obtain a closer
-range, nothing is gained by moving two or three hundred yards,
-while the guns are exposed to considerable risk. The guns are just
-as effective at 1,000 yards as at 800, and when a closer range is
-necessary they must await the opportunity for moving up to close
-range, _i.e._, 300 or 400 yards, where their fire may be decisive.
-
-
-COVER
-
-Cover may be of two kinds:
-
-(1) _Cover from fire._
-
-(2) _Cover from view._
-
-Cover from fire must be proof against the projectiles likely to be
-used against it--that is, against rifle fire and shrapnel. “Cover
-from fire” should also be “cover from view” if possible; it must
-be inconspicuous, and should be of the same colour and material as
-the background and locality. It must be as low as is compatible
-with command, and must never be on the skyline. The following
-points in the order given constitute good “cover from fire”:
-
-(1) Bullet proof.
-
-(2) Good field of fire.
-
-(3) Invisibility.
-
-(4) Protection from enfilade fire.
-
-(5) Good line of retreat (under cover).
-
-“Cover from view” is often not cover from fire, and must be used
-with great caution; it is the principal means by which guns are
-brought up to the fire position without the enemy’s knowledge,
-thus effecting a surprise. Cover may be either (1) natural, (2)
-artificial, (3) a combination of both.
-
-“Cover from fire” will generally be artificial or a combination of
-natural and artificial cover, because natural cover will seldom be
-found that is suitable for machine guns, although _partial_ cover
-from fire may often be found behind a bank, a rock, or in a ditch.
-
-“_Cover from view_” will generally be natural cover, and will be
-used to conceal the guns while approaching a position to occupy
-it and, when in position, to effect a surprise. When used in
-position to effect a surprise, it must be remembered that the
-moment the guns open “rapid” fire the cover is no longer any
-protection--indeed, it may be a source of great danger should it
-be isolated or conspicuous, such as a patch of scrub in a plain,
-or a clump of bushes on a hillside, as it will form a mark to aim
-at for every gun and rifle within range. “Cover from view” may be
-also “cover from fire,” as when folds in the ground or a ravine
-are used to conceal the guns. It may also be artificial cover,
-such as screens of boughs and brushwood as used by the Japanese
-at Liao-yang to conceal their march, or to hide guns in position.
-Hurdles covered with grass, reeds, bush, or branches of trees to
-closely imitate the surrounding growth, and placed as screens to
-hide the guns until the moment arrives for opening fire, will often
-prove a most valuable method of concealing guns in position, and
-under favourable circumstances the guns may even open fire from
-behind the screens without being discovered. This method requires
-constant practice in peace to attain success on service--indeed,
-the necessity for the most thorough peace training and constant
-practice in all the details of bringing guns into action, making
-cover, taking up alternative positions, retiring under mutual
-support, etc., cannot be too strongly urged on section commanders.
-Little ammunition is available for practice in our own service,
-it is true, but there is nothing to prevent constant practice in
-this vital duty of the machine gunner; and by getting a few men to
-represent the enemy, with an intelligent officer and a pair of good
-glasses, most valuable help can be given by criticising the manner
-the guns are handled, and the amount of exposure or concealment of
-the gun and detachment in taking up a position or making cover.
-
-Artificial cover may be either excavated or built up, or a
-combination of both. Excavated cover will usually take the form
-of a pit of sufficient size to hold the tripod, ammunition, and
-three men, and deep enough to conceal the gun and men not only
-from view, but from fire at “effective” range. This form of cover
-is particularly good on a level plain, the muzzle of the gun being
-just above the surface of the ground. The rear side of the pit may
-require to be enlarged to take the long leg of the tripod where
-time is limited and the pit has not been made large enough to take
-the tripod in any position, but it is advisable to make the pit of
-sufficient area to allow the gun to be worked in any direction.
-With an adjustable tripod, the pit should be so deep that the gun
-is completely concealed below the surface of the ground, and it is
-only raised when it is intended to open fire.
-
-Other forms of cover consist of epaulements, trenches, sangars,
-etc., which will not differ essentially from those given in the
-manual of Military Engineering. In all types of “cover from fire”
-care must be taken that the cover is high enough to protect No.
-1 from bullets fired at ranges up to 1,400 yards, taking into
-consideration the angle of descent of the bullets at that range and
-the distance of No. 1 from the cover.
-
-Cover can seldom, if ever, combine all the points enumerated here,
-and it will lie with the section commander to discriminate between
-them and decide what points he will sacrifice in favour of others
-more important: thus it may be necessary, where concealment is the
-chief object, to forgo “cover from fire” at the longer ranges in
-favour of a low parapet or even none at all. It is only possible
-to indicate in outline the principles that should be followed;
-practice in training and the experience thus gained alone will make
-the reader an expert.
-
-Shields will be found of great value in the final stages of the
-battle, when machine guns are pushed up to close range to assist
-in the final assault. They are too heavy to carry on the guns, and
-should be with the ammunition in the first-line transport, where
-they are easily obtained if required.
-
-
-COVERING FIRE
-
-Machine guns will often be used to cover the advance of infantry
-from “long” to “effective” range when the artillery is still
-occupied in the artillery duel and the infantry first come under
-effective rifle fire from the enemy. The ease with which they can
-instantly open and cease fire, concentrate on a particular spot, or
-sweep a line of trenches, renders them particularly suited for this
-purpose, and the Japanese constantly used them to keep down the
-enemy’s rifle fire in this manner during the late war.
-
-The narrow beaten zone enables them to fire safely over the heads
-of advancing infantry from all ranges beyond 800 yards, provided
-the infantry are at least 200 yards from the enemy fired at. A
-study of the table of trajectory in the Appendix to _Manual of
-Military Training_ will enable the machine gunner to decide the
-circumstances under which the fire is safe in each case.
-
-Positions on the flanks and if possible to the front of the
-advancing infantry will render covering fire most effective, but
-these positions will rarely be possible. The first consideration
-is the concealment of the gun from the enemy’s artillery, which
-can easily silence them if exposed. It is also necessary that the
-positions selected should be sufficiently commanding to enable the
-battery commander to see the attacking infantry during the whole
-advance, so as to fire only when they are moving, while at the same
-time he must be able to see the position of the enemy’s trenches
-and thus direct the fire on any part desired.
-
-
-INDIRECT FIRE
-
-The best method of using covering fire in the early stages of the
-attack is by _indirect fire_ from the reverse slopes of a hill
-or from behind a ridge or other feature. This is not difficult
-to carry out and in no way lessens the accuracy of the fire or
-endangers the troops in front, as the following experiment will
-prove.
-
-
-EXPERIMENT IN INDIRECT FIRE
-
-The following is an extract from an article by First Lieutenant A.
-E. Phillips of the 10th Cavalry, from the _Journal_ of the United
-States Cavalry Association for July 1909:
-
-“To determine how many, if any, of the bullets from the machine gun
-would strike troops in front of an assumed ‘hill’ over which the
-gun was to fire, canvas frames were used to represent such objects,
-the targets being concealed from view.
-
-“The target consisted of a strip of target cloth 6 ft. high and
-15 yards wide, along the bottom edge of which is pasted a row of
-kneeling figures with an interval of a yard from centre to centre.
-Across the target and parallel to its top edge was drawn a narrow
-black line tangent to the tops of the heads of the figures. Value
-of hits on any figure = 5; value of hits on the cloth below the
-line = 3; value of hits on the cloth above the line = 1. Canvas
-frame, 8 ft. high, placed 200 yards in front of the gun. Rapid fire:
-
-
- _First Experiment_
-
- Range 800 yards
-
- -------+-------------------------------+-----------------------------
- | No. of Hits. |
- No. of +------+-------+-------+--------+ Remarks.
- shots. | Figs.| 5’s. | 3’s. | Total. |
- -------+------+-------+-------+--------+-----------------------------
- | | | | |
- 30 | 5 | 10 | 12 | 22 | Line of sight was 5 ft.
- 30 | 8 | 10 | 9 | 19 | below top of obstruction.
- | | | | | All shots over.
- -------+------+-------+-------+--------+-----------------------------
-
-
- _Second Experiment_
-
- Range 1,000 yards
-
- -------+----------------------------------+---------------------------
- | No. of Hits. |
- No. of +------+-----+-----+---------------+
- shots. | Figs.| 5’s.| 3’s.|Total per cent.| Remarks.
- | | | | of figs. hit. |
- -------+------|-----|-----|---------------+---------------------------
- | | | | |
- 30 | 9 | 11 | 4 | 60 | Line of sight was 3 ft.
- 30 | 12 | 17 | 7 | 80 | below top of obstruction.
- | | | | | All shots over.
- -------+------+-----+-----+---------------+---------------------------
-
-
- _Third Experiment_
-
- Range 1,200 yards
-
- -------+----------------------------------+---------------------------
- | No. of Hits. |
- No. of +------+-----+-----+---------------+
- shots. | Figs.| 5’s.| 3’s.|Total per cent.| Remarks.
- | | | | of figs. hit. |
- -------+------|-----|-----|---------------+---------------------------
- 30 | 2 | 2 | 5 | 13 | Line of sight was 3 ft.
- 30 | 4 | 5 | 13 | 27 | below top of obstruction.
- 0 | 8 | 11 | 9 | 53 | All shots over.
- -------+------+-----+-----+---------------+---------------------------
-
-“It will be noticed no 1’s were made. Assuming the height above
-the ground of the average mounted soldier as 8 ft., had a troop
-of cavalry mounted been 200 yards in front of the machine guns
-in the third experiment, the line of sight would have struck
-about the backs of their horses, and all bullets would have gone
-over the riders with at least 4 feet to spare, as proved by the
-experiment.... The troop mounted could have moved forward to within
-100 yards of the target and would not have been struck by the
-bullets.”
-
-The methods of carrying out indirect covering fire will vary
-according to the nature of the position selected and the way the
-guns are to be laid. This is one of the few occasions when a
-battery or two may have all their guns in line close together. If
-the slope is a steep one, they may be pushed up close to the crest,
-but on a gentle slope they must be placed sufficiently far back to
-avoid the forward effect of shrapnel bursting on the crest line.
-
-The battery commander will select the position for the guns and
-will then give each gun or section a section of front to fire on.
-The method of marking off this section is as follows: two iron rods
-about 3 ft. long for each gun are painted white, and are then “laid
-off” from the gun to the target, in an exact line, the first being
-on the reverse slope a few yards short of the crest; the next on or
-just behind the crest line. By aligning the gun on the rods, fire
-is brought on the centre of the target; should traversing fire be
-required, the limits may be marked by similar sticks on either side.
-
-There are two methods of laying the gun. (1) By observation of
-fire. (2) By quadrant elevation. The first method has been already
-described, and the second must be done by using the following
-table in conjunction with an instrument for elevating the gun at
-the required angle; but it must be remembered that each gun will
-require adjusting to its own angle of elevation to suit its known
-error at each range. Thus a gun which is known to require sighting
-at 900 yards when firing at 1,000 should receive 1° 10½ and not 1°
-25½. When proper instruments are not obtainable, very fair results
-may be obtained by using an ordinary clinometer. The necessary
-allowance for the height the gun is above the target must be made,
-or, in other words, the angle of sight as shown by the clinometer
-must be deducted from the quadrant elevation given on the gun.
-
-[Illustration: DIAGRAM IV
-
-TO SHOW METHOD OF LAYING BY AIMING POSTS
-
- aa. Aiming Posts (about 15^x apart and some distance in front
- of gun.)
-
- ttt. Targets.]
-
-
-TABLE OF ELEVATION FOR MAXIM ·303 USING AMMUNITION GIVING 2,000 F.S.
-
- ------------+---------------------------
- Range. | Angles of elevation on the
- | Maxim gun.
- ------------+---------------------------
- 200 yards | 0 4·0 0 1
- 300 ” | 0 9·5 ”
- 400 ” | 0 17·0 ”
- 500 ” | 0 25·5 ”
- 600 ” | 0 35·5 ”
- 700 ” | 0 45·5 ”
- 800 ” | 0 57·5 ”
- 900 ” | 1 10·5 ”
- 1,000 ” | 1 25·5 ”
- 1,100 ” | 1 41·5 ”
- 1,200 ” | 1 57·5 ”
- 1,300 ” | 2 16·5 ”
- 1,400 ” | 2 37·5 ”
- 1,500 ” | 2 59·5 ”
- 1,600 ” | 3 22·5 ”
- 1,700 ” | 3 47·5 ”
- 1,800 ” | 4 14·5 ”
- 1,900 ” | 4 43·5 ”
- 2,000 ” | 5 14·5 ”
- 2,100 ” | 5 42·0 ”
- 2,200 ” | 6 22·0 ”
- 2,300 ” | 6 59·0 ”
- 2,400 ” | 7 40·0 ”
- 2,500 ” | 8 25·0 ”
- 2,600 ” | 9 16·0 ”
- 2,700 ” | 10 18·0 ”
- 2,800 ” | 11 18·0 ”
- ------------+---------------------------
-
-What is required is the angle of _quadrant elevation_ to be put on
-the gun in order that the shots may strike the target at a known
-range. From range table obtain _angle of tangent elevation_; now
-if the target is _below_ the guns we must _subtract_ the angle of
-sight (_m_), if the target is _above_ the guns we must _add_ the
-angle of sight (_m_) to obtain correct angle of quadrant elevation.
-
- _To obtain angle of sight m_
-
-(1) When target is visible from the immediate vicinity of guns the
-angle may be measured by pocket clinometer or other mechanical
-means; or, if heights can be obtained from a contoured map, from
-the formula:
-
- _m_ = (_h_ × 1146)/R
-
-where _h_ = difference in _feet_ of height between guns and target;
-R = range in yards.
-
-(2) When target is not visible from immediate vicinity of guns, _m_
-may be found from the following formula:
-
-[Illustration: DIAGRAM V
-
- (a_{1} × OG + a_{2} × OT)/GT
-
- Where a_{1} is the angle of sight from O to G; a_{2} is the angle
- of sight from O to T.]
-
-Angles of elevation are read plus, angles of depression minus; T
-being the target, G the gun, and O the observer.
-
-Before firing it is necessary to ascertain that the trajectory will
-clear the intervening crest--_i.e._ see that the angle of slope to
-the top of crest is less than the angle of Q.E. at which the gun is
-likely to be fired. If there is an obstacle some distance in front
-of the guns, to ascertain if the trajectory will clear it make a
-liberal estimate of the range to the obstacle and ascertain if the
-quadrant elevation to be fired at is greater than that which would
-be required to hit the obstacle.
-
-If it is possible to place a mark to aim at near the crest with a
-given elevation which will ensure the fire striking the target,
-this will much simplify indirect fire, but the combination of
-circumstances required to enable this to be done will not often be
-found.
-
-When all is ready to open fire the battery commander will take up a
-position from which to direct it, and will give the orders to open
-and cease fire and name the guns or sections to fire. The section
-commanders will watch the fire effect of their guns and give the
-orders necessary for correcting elevation or direction. The battery
-captain will assist the commanding officer by noting the fire
-effect.
-
-It will be seen from the foregoing that considerable practice is
-required to enable indirect fire to be efficiently carried out; but
-the results obtained in covering the advance of infantry and thus
-enabling them to push up quickly to close range, without the delay
-and exhaustion caused by a prolonged fire fight, will more than
-repay the time spent in perfecting machine-gun detachments in this
-duty.
-
-
-SUMMARY OF GENERAL PRINCIPLES
-
-_With Cavalry._--To enable it to retain its mobility and do away
-with the necessity of dismounting whole squadrons for fire action.
-To give it greater power both in attack and defence, and enable
-small detachments to hold important strategical or tactical points.
-To act as escort to artillery and to assist in the pursuit.
-
-_With Infantry._--To cover the first advance with fire. In attack
-they should be held back until the last reserve has been thrown in,
-when they must be used to bring an overwhelming fire to bear on
-the point selected for assault. Owing to their narrow beaten zone
-and great accuracy, they can safely fire over the heads of prone
-infantry within 100 yards of the position. A Japanese officer who
-commanded a machine-gun battery at the battle of Mukden said on one
-occasion he “continued this fire until their attacking infantry
-were within 30 metres of the enemy’s position.”[6]
-
-They may also be used to reinforce threatened points, when their
-mobility will enable them to arrive at a distant part of the
-battlefield with the rapidity of cavalry. They should rarely be
-used in the firing line, where their fire, being dispersed, is less
-effective than an equal volume of rifle fire, and where they are
-at once the target for every rifle. Machine guns can never engage
-artillery, and should avoid engaging other machine guns or firing
-on a line of skirmishers.
-
-They are particularly useful at night with the outposts, and can be
-trained by day on roads, defiles, or bridges, and thus can be used
-in the dark to sweep the approaches with accurate fire.
-
-The Golden Rule for Machine Gun Tactics may be thus expressed:
-
-“Conceal your guns, utilise cover, and operate by surprise--for
-surprise is the essence of tactical success.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER III
-
-EMPLOYMENT IN THE FIELD WITH THE INDEPENDENT CAVALRY
-
- The Germans have resolutely adopted the plan of attaching machine
- guns to cavalry, and they seem thus to understand the modern
- combination of fire and shock tactics. To the machine gun the
- fire action, to the horseman the morale action--so much the more
- easy and productive of results, as the machine gun is the more
- powerful.--CHIEF OF 2ND BUREAU, French General Staff.
-
-
-Since this was written it has been generally recognised by the
-leading military authorities of the world that the machine gun
-is essentially a cavalry weapon; and Colonel Zaleski in a recent
-article on the lessons of the Russo-Japanese War goes so far as to
-say, “Even their addition to squadrons cannot be carried out too
-rapidly, and this weapon would now appear to be indispensable to
-cavalry.”
-
-The truth of this statement is obvious to the student of modern
-tactics who is also acquainted with the machine gun as organised
-and equipped on the Continent and in the United States, where it
-is as mobile as the cavalryman himself and as quick in coming into
-action.[7] When its true rôle is understood and its tremendous
-fire power made full use of, it will go far to render cavalry
-independent of the rifle, and to restore to them that dash
-and independence of action which made them the terror of the
-battlefields of the past.
-
-The following extract from an article in _The Times_ newspaper
-of August 23rd, 1905, by their special correspondent with the
-Japanese Army in Manchuria, shows the necessity for machine guns by
-emphasising the danger of training cavalry to fight as infantry.
-
-“The prime value of cavalry lies in its mobility. As an actual
-fighting unit in battle a body of cavalry is much inferior to an
-equal body of infantry. The discrepancy is less marked if the
-cavalryman carries a rifle, but there is always the encumbrance of
-the horses, which require the attention of one man in every four
-when the rifle is employed. It being postulated that tactics evolve
-themselves into the effort to obtain a superiority of rifle fire,
-it is evident that the necessity of dispensing with one quarter of
-a body of mounted riflemen before their weapons can be brought to
-bear greatly lessens the value of that body. On the other hand, the
-mobility of the mounted rifleman compensates for his comparative
-ineffectiveness to such a degree, it is believed in the British
-Army, that elaborate arrangements have been made for the provision
-and training of what is known as mounted infantry. Granted the
-value of mounted and mobile men as an auxiliary to infantry, the
-question arises, What is the weapon with which they shall be
-armed, and what the nature of the training to which they shall
-be subjected? These things depend upon whether the mobility of a
-mounted man is regarded as secondary to his function as a rifleman,
-or whether his weapon be merely adapted to his mobility. In other
-words, are mounted men wanted for their riding or their shooting?
-The arming of our cavalry with rifles, and certain modifications
-in its training, together with the formation of corps of mounted
-infantry, show that those who held the ear of the Secretary of
-State for War a few years ago pinned their faith to the superior
-value of shooting, and regarded mobility in a mounted man only as
-a means to an end. If we turn to the conflict now proceeding in
-Manchuria, it is found that in one respect it differs considerably
-from other great wars, particularly those which have been fought
-on level ground. Cavalry has been conspicuous not by its absence,
-but by its utter and astonishing ineffectiveness. From Liao-yang
-northwards both armies have occupied part of the level plain
-traversed by the Liao River. The right of the Russian Army and
-the left of the Japanese have faced each other for nearly twelve
-months, in country as flat as a billiard-table and as suitable for
-cavalry evolutions as any of the low countries in which the famous
-leaders of last century made their reputations. Here have been
-conditions ideal for the employment of shock tactics; a veritable
-jousting-ground where the vaunted Russian cavalry might have run
-a-tilt at the sword-worshipping Japanese. Yet no single instance
-has been recorded of combat between mounted men, and to the best
-of my belief none has occurred.
-
-“Is it, then, that those who advocate the substitution of mounted
-infantry for cavalry are in the right; that the lancer, hussar,
-and dragoon of picturesque memory have become obsolete in these
-days of the breechloading rifle? Almost it would seem so. But
-for two important considerations, the case for mounted infantry
-might well be deemed as proved. These considerations, however,
-are of such a nature as to lead the observer to directly opposite
-conclusions: to conclude actually that cavalry pure and simple is
-as useful to the army of to-day as it was to the army of Napoleon’s
-day; and that it is totally erroneous to suppose that mounted
-infantry can be an efficient substitute for cavalry. The cause of
-the effectiveness of Japanese cavalry is not far to seek. The men
-are the most intelligent of Japanese soldiers, and their many fine
-patrol performances are evidence of the sound methods in which
-they have been trained. Their weakness lies in the poor quality
-of the horses, and the fact that the Russian cavalry outnumbers
-them by six to one. Marked inferiority of force, in all forms of
-rivalry, is a fatal disadvantage, and it is for this reason that
-the Japanese have failed to shine in the rôle which experience has
-assigned to cavalry. The Russian cavalry, on the other hand, is
-estimated to number 30,000 sabres, a force of mounted men which, in
-the circumstances, ought to have made the lives of the Japanese
-commanders on the flank of the army a burden to them. Instead of
-which, life in the rear of the Japanese front has been a sinecure,
-a positive _dolce far niente_, undisturbed even by the distant
-flash of any of these sabres. Is this a proof that, if the sabres
-had been rifles, something could have been accomplished? Very far
-from it. It is because the Russian cavalry, armed as it is with
-rifle and--shade of Seydlitz!--bayonet, is trained to fight only
-on foot, thereby throwing away its most valuable weapon, mobility,
-that it has proved no more effective in the field than a flock of
-sheep. That the microscopic force of Japanese cavalry has held
-the Russian throughout the campaign--an exceedingly remarkable
-performance when it is remembered how indifferently the Japanese
-are mounted--testifies clearly enough that there must be something
-futile about the arming and training of the Russians.... They
-failed as cavalry and they failed as riflemen, and the reason of
-the failure was that they are neither fish, flesh, fowl, nor good
-red herring. They are organised as cavalry, but have been trained
-to dismount on service. In peace they are armed with lance and
-sword, and in war they are asked to fight with rifle and bayonet.
-Truly an absurdity, worthy of one of those nebulous units evolved
-by our own Parliamentary reformers. Last month Mishchenko, marching
-forty-five miles in four long summer days, again descended on
-the Japanese flank, accounted for a couple of companies and a
-field hospital, frightened a number of Chinese carters, and
-stopped before a thin line of infantry guarding the approaches
-to Hsin-minting, where Japanese supplies are stored sky-high.
-Had he known it, he was within an ace of picking up a number of
-distinguished British officers, besides newspaper correspondents,
-and a famous general whom the Emperor William has specially
-delighted to honour. But an inferior number of riflemen checked the
-advance, and no use was made of the mobility of the column, except
-to retire by a circuitous route.... So far as my information goes,
-the Russian cavalry west of Mukden never once took the offensive
-during the battle. Strapped up with rifle and bayonet, they are
-incapable of wielding the sword; their lances, except in the case
-of a small proportion of the Cossacks, have been left in Russia.
-So it was useless to contemplate old-fashioned cavalry work. But
-the Japanese communications were an easy mark, and it is one of the
-most singular features of Russian tactics that they did not avail
-themselves of so glaring an opportunity. Even as mounted infantry
-they should have been able to destroy Nogi’s communications. Yet
-they never made a single attempt at interference.
-
-“The deduction is obvious: either the training or arming must be at
-fault. When a mounted man dismounts he sacrifices his mobility to
-become a weak infantryman. The Russian cavalry has been trained to
-fight dismounted, and the result is that the Russians have divested
-themselves of the one arm which, many keen observers believe,
-might have availed to turn the tide in their favour. The battle of
-Mukden was a great defeat, though not an overwhelming disaster.
-At one period the result hung in the balance, and it is no wild
-statement to say that if the Russian cavalry had been trained
-and armed in orthodox cavalry fashion, and handled in a manner
-consistent with cavalry tradition, Mukden would have proved a drawn
-battle. It is my firm belief--a belief shared with many others more
-competent to judge--that if French, with 10,000 British cavalry,
-had been given a free hand early in the war on the Russian side,
-there would have been no necessity for Kuropatkin to retire from
-his strong position at Liao-yang, and I have no less hesitation in
-saying that if the same able commander, with such a cavalry force
-as I have mentioned, had been attached to the Japanese side at
-Liao-yang or at Mukden, there would be no Russian army in Manchuria
-to-day. _En passant_ it may be remarked that if the Japanese
-cavalry had been capable of pursuit at Mukden, it would have proved
-a terrible thorn in the already bleeding Russian side. As it was,
-the Japanese were out-numbered and hence completely ineffective.”
-
-If the writer of this article is correct in his deduction of the
-lesson to be learned by cavalry from this war--and his opinion
-has since been confirmed by military opinion generally,--it
-would appear that the machine gun is just the one thing needed
-to give cavalry the fire power of infantry, while retaining
-mobility and their proper rôle in all the circumstances of the
-modern battlefield. It will therefore be instructive to study
-the possibilities of machine guns with cavalry in the various
-situations which may arise in the course of a campaign.
-
-The use of machine guns in certain stages of an action is similar
-whatever the scale of the operations may be; and to avoid
-unnecessary repetition, such phases as the Pursuit, the Retreat,
-etc., have only been dealt with once. The tactics of the various
-bodies of cavalry are based on the principles laid down in the
-Training Manuals, the Independent cavalry being treated in this
-chapter, the Divisional and Protective in the next.
-
-While the opposing armies are still at a considerable distance
-apart, the Independent Cavalry will gain touch with the enemy
-and endeavour to find out such information as may clear up the
-strategical situation and afford the main army strategical freedom
-of action; they may also carry out special missions such as
-cutting the enemy’s communications, carrying out raids, or seizing
-important strategical points. This can usually only be accomplished
-when the enemy’s cavalry has been defeated. It will therefore be
-the first duty of the Independent Cavalry to seek out and defeat
-the cavalry of the enemy in order to be free to carry out its
-mission.[8]
-
-This Independent Cavalry will never be less than a Division,
-while it may consist of two or three Divisions in the case of
-a war between any of the Great Powers. The nation that is weak
-in cavalry will therefore do well to make up for this deficiency
-by the employment of great numbers of machine guns so organised
-and equipped that they will be able not only to accompany their
-cavalry anywhere, but, in addition, to operate and manœuvre as
-self-contained units. They will thus free the cavalry from the
-necessity of dismounted action when met by superior numbers,
-and from being compelled to detach squadrons to secure tactical
-positions to check the enemy, or strategical points of importance
-which it may be vital to possess. In addition to this, detached
-machine guns may be used in the place of mounted escorts to the
-Horse Artillery, and to enable single troops to be used in the
-place of contact squadrons without detracting from their offensive
-or defensive strength.
-
-The Divisional General of Cavalry will have 24 machine guns under
-the present organisation, viz. two guns with each regiment; and
-it must be assumed that they have been organised and trained to
-work together, as suggested in Chapter I., in order to enable them
-to be used as fire units in co-operation with their brigades or
-the Division. It will depend upon the nature of the country, the
-tactical situation and the strength and morale of the opposing
-cavalry, whether the G.O.C. retains all four batteries in his
-own hands or gives one or more to the brigade commanders. Every
-situation requires its own special treatment, and the following is
-only given as one of many possible methods of using machine guns in
-the preliminary stages of the cavalry combat. We will assume that a
-Cavalry Division is acting as Independent Cavalry and is operating
-against an unknown but superior force of cavalry as yet unlocated,
-in country such as will be met with in a European campaign.
-
-The formation for the march towards the enemy will of course depend
-on the roads available and the general nature of the country, but
-an advanced guard of one brigade would be sent out with orders to
-push forward tactical reconnoitring patrols supported by contact
-troops or squadrons. This brigade might be given two batteries of
-machine guns, while the G.O.C. retained two batteries with the
-main body, which would probably move as concentrated as possible
-in two wings with flank guards, and a battery of machine guns on
-each flank. The advanced guard commander would use one battery
-of machine guns to give each “contact squadron” a section of two
-guns and thus enable it to retain its mobility if held up by rifle
-fire. He would keep one battery intact to use in the manner to be
-indicated later with his main guard.
-
-We will follow one of these “contact squadrons” and see how the
-machine guns may be employed to assist it. In the first place the
-squadron now possesses the fire power of an extra hundred rifles
-and can therefore afford to send out stronger patrols and give
-them more support. The contact squadron, having sent out its
-patrols and any detachments necessary for special services, will
-sooner or later be called upon to afford active support to one of
-its patrols when the latter come in touch with the enemy. Upon the
-information furnished by this patrol, as to the strength of the
-enemy and the nature of the country, will depend the action to be
-taken.
-
-The necessity for brushing aside all opposition and pushing forward
-will probably cause the commander of the contact squadron to attack
-with vigour, and such a course will compel the enemy to accept the
-engagement mounted, or if inferior in strength or morale, to take
-up a position for dismounted action and hold the squadron by rifle
-fire.
-
-In the first case the squadron with scouts in front will move in
-column of troops ready to wheel into line for the attack. The
-machine guns should move in line immediately in rear of the rear
-troop and as close as possible, so as not to be seen from the
-front. The subsequent action of the machine guns must of course
-depend on the method of attack of the squadron and the nature of
-the country; but the objects in view will be (1) to support the
-attack by fire up to the moment of the collision, and then to
-bring fire to bear upon the retreating enemy and prevent their
-rallying; (2) to take up a position to cover the retirement of the
-squadron and enable it to re-form if worsted in the encounter. It
-is likely that if the first object is successfully attained and
-the fire of the section brought to bear on the enemy’s squadron,
-from any range under 800 yards, for only 30 seconds, the effect on
-the closed body of horsemen, whether in column or line, would be
-such as to throw them into considerable confusion at the moment of
-the charge, while any attempt to charge the guns, even by a second
-squadron, must be abortive and result in disaster. The squadron
-leader should have arranged beforehand with his machine-gun
-commander to manœuvre with a view to this co-operation, and will
-give the signal a few moments before wheeling into line to attack,
-when the machine guns will gallop out to the most suitable flank,
-and come into action as rapidly as possible so as to enfilade the
-enemy’s advance. The moment the charging squadrons mask the fire
-of the guns, they must remount and gallop to a fresh position in
-anticipation of the pursuit, in order to bring fire to bear on the
-retreating enemy and prevent a rally; or to cover the retirement
-of the squadron and enable it to rally and reform. The effect of
-his fire and the success or otherwise of the first collision will
-enable the section commander to decide instantly which of these
-two actions will be necessary. It will be seldom that the country
-is so flat that some feature cannot be found giving a good field
-of fire or commanding a road, or bridge, or other defile by which
-the enemy must retreat, or which they must pass in pursuit, and the
-use of such features will greatly assist the action of machine
-guns. Although both guns will fire together before the collision,
-their subsequent action must be made in mutual support, one gun
-firing while the other races to a new position from which it can
-overtake and flank the retiring enemy, so that, if possible, one
-gun is always firing at effective range while the other is moving.
-In the same way, if covering the retreat of their own squadron, one
-gun will fire while the other retires to a second position and in
-turn covers the retirement of the first. The guns must not hesitate
-to separate widely in order to obtain unseen the best possible
-positions from which to fire, but must always be able to support
-each other. If the country is much broken, opportunities will be
-found for concealing the gun in a position from which to enfilade
-the pursuing cavalry at short range, or for bringing a cross fire
-to bear from both guns on a defile. Such an opportunity skilfully
-utilised, when the range has been accurately taken, and fire
-reserved until the main body is within close range (600 yards or
-less), should be so decisive in its result as to check the pursuit
-altogether and possibly turn defeat into victory, if the retiring
-squadron has had time to re-form and is in a position to launch a
-counter-attack at this moment.
-
-To make full use of machine guns with a squadron, it is necessary
-for the squadron leader thoroughly to understand their power and
-capabilities, and to anticipate their action and the result likely
-to ensue; otherwise he will be unable to do more than passively
-accept their support, and will fail to reap the advantage of their
-principal characteristic--their ability to surprise and their power
-suddenly to overwhelm with fire a superior body of troops.
-
-Should the enemy’s squadron be reinforced or be so superior in
-numbers that an attack appears inadvisable, it may be possible with
-the assistance of machine guns to equalise matters by concealing
-the guns in a donga or behind a ridge, a clump of trees, or group
-of rocks, and then manœuvring the squadron so as to draw the enemy
-across the front of the guns at close range. The best method of
-doing this is to lead the squadron, formed in column of troops,
-past the cover selected at a sharp pace, the guns being concealed
-on the outer flank or behind the rear troop as circumstances may
-require. As the squadron passes the selected spot, the machine guns
-will be dropped; and the squadron at the same moment wheeling into
-line towards the enemy, will hide the guns from view until they are
-concealed by the cover.
-
-The gun horses and the rest of the detachment not actually required
-to fire the guns should move on with the squadron, so that no
-indication is given the enemy that the guns are not still with the
-squadron. If this manœuvre is successfully accomplished, it will
-not be difficult to draw the enemy across the guns at close range.
-It is a manœuvre well worth practice in peace, but an opposing
-squadron should always be used to try to detect the guns and thus
-ensure that the concealment is properly carried out.
-
-We will now suppose a case where the enemy takes up a defensive
-position and the contact squadron has to force its way through.
-The squadron leader’s method of attack must entirely depend on the
-strength of the position, the force holding it, and the natural
-features of the country in the immediate vicinity; and on his plan
-of attack must depend the details of the action of the machine
-guns. The general principles governing their employment will remain
-the same, however much they may vary in the method of carrying out:
-the first is to supplement the rifle fire of the squadron so as to
-enable as many men as possible to remain mounted, while holding
-the enemy to his position; and the second is to gain superiority
-of fire for the squadron at the time and place selected by the
-squadron leader. We will suppose the position to be strong and
-the enemy to possess machine guns, and that the squadron leader’s
-plan is to hold the enemy to his position by a vigorous frontal
-attack, while he turns the weaker flank. To do this he may decide
-to use his guns for the containing attack supported by a troop,
-or to use his squadron for the containing attack and his guns to
-turn the flank. Having machine guns in position against him, it
-might be advisable to choose the latter course, because machine
-guns are less effective against a skirmishing line of attackers,
-while his own machine guns are more effective if they can gain the
-flank or rear of the enemy’s position and thus enfilade them, and
-any movement of mounted troops to repulse the turning movement,
-or take their attackers in flank, will afford the machine guns
-an opportunity for decisive fire action. Should the machine guns
-or one of them succeed in stalking the led horses of the enemy,
-their action will probably be decisive, as nothing affords a
-machine gun such an easy and effective target as the horses of a
-dismounted squadron, while the effect of fire on them is to render
-the squadron immobile and to place them out of action as cavalry
-altogether.
-
-The method of attack will probably be as follows. Scouts
-(dismounted) having been sent forward to reconnoitre and draw fire
-to disclose the extent of the position, two troops dismounted and
-widely extended will advance to the attack and open a heavy fire
-and push the attack as hotly as possible; at the same moment one
-troop (mounted) will move slowly round the flank which it is not
-intended to attack, keeping wide of the position and closed up,
-and in signalling communication with the squadron leader. This
-will probably draw attention to this flank, and the troop should
-report by signal any movement made by the enemy to check them.
-Rapid fire should now be ordered all along the line, and the troop
-on the flank should wheel and open out towards the enemy, but not
-approach within range if it can be avoided. Under cover of this
-demonstration, the machine guns with the remaining troop will work
-round the flank selected for attack, the guns being concealed on
-the outer flank of the troop and using every bit of cover possible
-to prevent being seen. Scouts must precede them, and the troop
-should screen their movements and engage the enemy with fire if
-opposed. Engagement with the enemy should be avoided as far as
-possible until the place selected for attack is reached, and the
-position turned. Even now the machine guns must avoid opening fire
-with the troop, and must endeavour to find a position from which an
-enfilading fire can be brought to bear at close range. Under cover
-of the surprise caused by the sudden burst of machine-gun fire, the
-second gun must push farther round to the rear, and try to fire on
-the led horses or catch the enemy’s guns on the move, for they will
-certainly be moved to meet this fresh attack. If the horses cannot
-be reached, the second gun must seek the best position to bring a
-reverse fire in support of the first gun; and unless a really good
-target is obtained, fire should be reserved until the first gun is
-discovered and attacked, when its intention to retire must be the
-signal for a burst of heavy fire which must be kept up until the
-first gun is in a fresh position and ready to open fire to cover
-the retirement of the second.
-
-This action will enable the squadron leader to use the troop
-feinting on the other flank, which he will have recalled on the
-first sign of firing by the flank attack, in order to reinforce the
-point where the attack can be pressed home.
-
-The machine guns must avoid engaging those of the enemy, while
-always endeavouring to catch them limbered up, _i.e._ when
-changing position or while coming into or going out of action, for
-then they are most vulnerable. The situation at the moment of the
-flank attack is this: The front of the position is attacked by a
-strong but widely extended firing line which overlaps the flanks
-and compels a strong defensive firing line to check its advance.
-If the defender decides to put his machine guns into position here
-and to reserve half the squadron for defence of the flanks, the
-great extension of the attack renders their fire of little effect
-as long as the attack utilises cover and advances by rushes from
-the right or left of sections; on the other hand, if he decides to
-put the squadron into the firing line and to use his machine guns
-to protect his flanks, he has either to divide his guns or wait
-till he can see which flank is threatened, and he cannot ignore the
-troop which is moving against one. Consequently, he must either
-be weaker than the flank attack--in which case it is likely to
-succeed; or he must withdraw troops from his position to strengthen
-the threatened flank--in which case there should be no difficulty
-in pushing home the front attack with the aid of the extra troop;
-while the position of the machine guns on the flank and rear
-should render his retirement from the position very costly. In all
-probability the threat of turning a flank either by mounted troops
-or by machine guns will compel the enemy to abandon the position in
-the case of a minor engagement between squadrons--especially where
-a counter-attack is rendered impossible by the strength of the
-frontal attack.
-
-When touch has been gained by the contact squadrons and the enemy
-found in force, they will either be compelled by superior numbers
-to fall back or they must be at once supported; in either case the
-advanced guard will now become engaged and will endeavour to break
-through the advanced guard of the enemy, or, if in touch with the
-main body of the enemy’s cavalry, will endeavour to prevent him
-breaking through till their own Cavalry Division comes up.
-
-If it is decided to attack, the action will follow much the same
-lines as that of the contact squadrons, but on a larger scale and
-with the addition of artillery; and the machine guns will be used
-in much the same way to support the mounted attack up to the moment
-of the charge, for which purpose the machine guns working in pairs
-on the opposite flank to the artillery must be pushed forward to
-occupy positions from which to bring fire to bear on the hostile
-squadrons while manœuvring prior to the attack. The whole battery
-may be used for this purpose if the ground favours their action;
-or a single section only, while the remainder are held back as a
-reserve to complete a successful charge or to cover the retirement
-of the brigade in the event of failure.
-
-The officer commanding the machine-gun battery will remain with the
-brigadier and must be perfectly acquainted with his plans, and will
-receive from him direct orders as to the way the guns are to be
-employed to support the attack. The details for carrying out these
-orders should be left to the battery commander, who will issue his
-own instructions to the section commanders, who should also be
-told the brigadier’s plans. The section commanders must be given a
-free hand in selecting fire positions and in all details relating
-to coming into action and opening and ceasing fire--the battery
-commander’s orders only indicating the flank and extent of the
-positions of observation for each section, the method of action and
-the object to be attained. Under special circumstances he may order
-certain specific action such as reservation of fire, simultaneous
-fire on a given signal, or concentration of fire of a certain
-target; but it must be remembered that definite orders of this
-nature tie the hands of section commanders, and tend to paralyse
-their action and destroy initiative, and can be justified on rare
-occasions only. Should the enemy take up a defensive position,
-the machine guns will be used to economise dismounted men and to
-bring a sudden and intense fire to bear on the defenders when they
-attempt to retire from the position. Cavalry will not “assault” a
-position, but rather try to compel the defender to retire from it
-by turning a flank and threatening his led horses or his line of
-retreat, while he is held to his ground by fire. Some guns should
-also be held in reserve to meet a counter-attack or to be launched
-in pursuit when the enemy attempts to retire. The machine guns
-with the contact squadrons will be available, as these squadrons
-become merged in the main guard, and they must now be used to hold
-tactical positions of importance and to hinder the march of the
-main body of the enemy by seizing all rising ground in front or to
-a flank of the approaching cavalry.
-
-The Division will now have concentrated and joined the advanced
-guard, and will be manœuvring in anticipation of the cavalry
-combat. All the machine guns, except those holding positions in
-front, will now be concentrated under the Divisional General. They
-will be used at this stage in conjunction with the artillery--but
-not in their vicinity--to support the deployment of the Division
-by their fire, and they must necessarily be concentrated and
-employed as batteries in order not to hinder the deployment and
-free manœuvre of their own cavalry. The flank opposite to that of
-the artillery must be used, and “positions of observation” must be
-maintained where the guns are concealed from view and if possible
-from artillery fire.
-
-The officer commanding the machine guns of the Division should
-remain with the G.O.C., and must be perfectly acquainted with his
-plans and intentions. As a rule fire will not be opened in the
-first instance except by his order. Officers commanding batteries
-must be where they can best direct their fire and at the same time
-be in signalling communication with their Chief. Ranges will be
-taken from the “position of observation,” but should the guns have
-to gallop to a fresh position and fire at once, the opportunity
-for using combined sights by the battery if the range be unknown
-and the time limited should not be neglected. Rising ground is very
-important at this stage, for it enables fire to be maintained until
-just before the collision.
-
-Should the ground permit of the machine-gun batteries approaching
-the enemy unseen, and enable them to reserve their fire from a
-concealed position until the closed bodies of the enemy’s squadrons
-come within effective range, the result should be so decisive as to
-render the attack of the Division successful, even against greatly
-superior numbers. The machine guns should render the envelopment of
-a flank by a superior force impossible, and their great mobility
-will enable them to meet easily any movement of this kind.
-
-They should avoid the enemy’s artillery, which alone can put them
-out of action, but they must boldly engage it within effective
-ranges should it open fire on the cavalry.
-
-The defeat of the independent cavalry alone will be of little
-value, and it will be necessary to ensure their complete
-destruction to enable the exact situation of the enemy’s forces
-to be discovered. A close and relentless pursuit is therefore
-imperative, and it must be remembered that machine guns with
-cavalry are far more effective in the pursuit than cavalry alone,
-because they move with the same speed; but whereas cavalry can only
-use the sword or lance against others similarly armed and capable
-of defending themselves, and both men and horses are equally
-subject to exhaustion, the machine guns on overtaking the enemy
-are able to shoot down men and horses without any more effort than
-is needed to set up the guns and work the elevating and traversing
-gear. The exhaustion of men and horses has no effect upon the
-accuracy or intensity of the fire, while the result is further to
-scatter and disperse bodies that may still retain any cohesion.
-
-
-IN THE PURSUIT
-
-There are many instances in war when cavalry flushed with victory
-and exhausted in the pursuit have been themselves caught and ridden
-down by troops that have rallied or by fresh supports; but machine
-guns have nothing to fear from cavalry, and can confidently await
-their attack while covering the retirement of their own cavalry.
-The longer they are in action, the more time there is for their own
-horses to recover their “wind,” and be ready to carry their guns
-out of action at a speed which renders pursuit useless. It must
-be remembered also that the machine guns with cavalry cannot be
-distinguished from that arm at a distance even when moving alone,
-while it is impossible to do so when they are with their regiment
-or brigade.
-
-The machine guns must anticipate the pursuit and race off to
-positions on the flanks and rear from which they can best cut off,
-and if possible annihilate, the retreating squadrons; no effort
-must be spared to inflict the maximum loss, and guns must be
-pushed up to close range even at the risk of being ridden down.
-
-The troops reserved for the pursuit should have their machine guns
-with them, as their co-operation will be of the greatest service,
-and regiments will probably act separately, and may be directed to
-special points to intercept the enemy or prevent reinforcements
-coming up.
-
-The Independent Cavalry, having defeated and scattered the enemy’s
-cavalry, are now in a position to send out strategical patrols;
-and having “torn aside the veil” are able to see the dispositions
-of his main armies, and are free to undertake raids on his
-communications and to harass and delay the march of his columns.
-
-Raids are only justified when some specific object can be
-attained, and are only likely to be effective during the course
-of operations, when both armies are in touch and awaiting
-reinforcements to renew hostilities.
-
-The cavalry will in most cases be more profitably employed in
-attacking the enemy’s main columns in flank or rear, and thus
-hindering their march by causing premature deployment. This action
-will bring the independent cavalry in contact with infantry. The
-machine guns can now be used to supplement the fire action and
-to enable as many squadrons as possible to remain mounted. They
-should be employed as separate units or attached to squadrons
-according to the nature of the engagement and the force to which
-they are opposed. Usually they will be held back in the preliminary
-stages of the dismounted fight, until the action has developed
-sufficiently to enable the general situation to be seen, when they
-will be sent forward under cover to positions from which they can
-develop superiority of fire, by concentrating against the enemy’s
-strongest points. This will not prevent the use of a few guns with
-the advanced guard to seize and hold important points, and nothing
-should prevent machine guns from seizing the key of the position,
-the moment this can be discovered.
-
-The four batteries of machine guns of the Division may be allotted
-as follows: With the advanced guard, one battery; with the main
-body (for use in firing line), two batteries; with the G.O.C. (in
-reserve), one battery.
-
-
-TO COVER RETIREMENT
-
-This reserve battery will enable the G.O.C. not only to reinforce
-a particular point or cover the retirement with a rapidity and
-effectiveness that no other form of reserve could do, but to use
-it to turn a flank or to meet a counter-attack without exposing
-his squadrons to fire during the movement. The security they
-are able to afford to the horses of the squadrons in the firing
-line will justify their occupying “positions of observation” on
-the rear flanks, from which they can protect them while waiting
-other employment. The deployment of the enemy’s infantry and the
-development of his fire will compel the cavalry commanders to
-break off the engagement; and to do this without loss under the
-heavy rifle fire to which he will now be subjected, this fire must
-be temporarily checked or rendered ineffective. Every machine gun
-will therefore be brought up to such positions as will enable them
-to sweep the enemy’s firing lines, and under a simultaneous fire
-from the 24 guns the dismounted men will be able to retire from
-the firing line and regain their horses. The retirement of the
-machine guns must be effected in the usual way, each section acting
-independently and retiring by alternate guns--no gun moving till
-the other is ready in a fresh position to open fire. The sections
-on the flanks should retire first, as they are better able to
-protect the centre by a cross fire.
-
-
-COVER IN FIRING LINE
-
-When the country is flat or the features devoid of natural
-cover, it will be necessary to provide pits for the machine guns
-practically in the firing line. If this is carried out with skill,
-the guns may be perfectly concealed, and protected even from
-artillery fire. These pits should be made along the whole front and
-as widely scattered as possible, and when a gun is discovered by
-the artillery it should immediately be lowered into the pit, out of
-sight, where it will be perfectly safe, until the artillery directs
-its fire elsewhere. The following instance from the Russo-Japanese
-War is an illustration of the skilful handling of machine guns
-under such conditions.
-
-
-EXAMPLE FROM RUSSO-JAPANESE WAR
-
-On June 8th, 1905, at Wan-ching, General Samsonov had two cavalry
-regiments and a machine-gun section of four guns. During the
-dismounted action these machine guns were concealed in the firing
-line, two in the centre 100 yards apart, and one on each flank
-about 400 yards away. When the firing line retired, the machine
-guns opened fire and held the position alone; and so well had they
-been posted, that although attacked by infantry, which advanced
-to within 300 yards of the position, supported by artillery which
-brought a heavy fire to bear on the front occupied by the machine
-guns, they were able to hold their ground for nearly three hours,
-when the Japanese abandoned the attack and fell back. It would be
-interesting to know if this astonishing success of machine guns,
-enabling the cavalry to defeat infantry supported by artillery in a
-fight of several hours’ duration, without risking their personnel
-or abandoning their mobility, was due to the use of natural cover
-or, as seems more probable, to the use of pits which would have
-afforded protection from artillery fire as well as concealment.
-
-
-IN THE BATTLE
-
-The hostile columns having arrived within striking distance, the
-battle will now take place, during which the Independent Cavalry
-will usually occupy a position in front and on the flank of the
-main line of battle. From here they will be able to co-operate by
-attacking on the flank, from which they can bring fire to bear
-concentrically with the main attack, while such a position favours
-pursuit on parallel lines, and is also a suitable one from which to
-prevent pursuit in the event of a retreat.[9] The machine guns will
-now assemble in batteries under their G.O.C., who will use them,
-as the occasion may demand, to hold “positions of observation,” to
-protect his front and flank in the early stages of the battle, and
-later, in conjunction with a few dismounted squadrons, to envelop
-the enemy’s flank and bring a powerful volume of fire to assist
-the main infantry attack, or to draw troops away from the point
-selected for assault.
-
-“The climax of the infantry attack is the assault which is made
-possible by superiority of fire,”[10] and the cavalry commander
-will be justified in using his 24 machine guns in assisting to
-attain this object, provided that in doing so they remain under his
-immediate orders and in a position from which they are instantly
-available for the pursuit.
-
-We have already seen how machine guns should co-operate in
-the pursuit, and their mobility will render them even more
-effective when pursuing infantry. The following example from the
-Russo-Japanese War may be of interest in this connection.
-
-
-EXAMPLE OF MACHINE GUNS USED IN PURSUIT
-
-A Russian infantry battalion which was retreating by a pontoon
-bridge across the Taitzu River was almost annihilated by a Japanese
-cavalry regiment, accompanied by machine guns, which swept the
-bridge; “and for the first time in this war,” adds the _Standard_
-correspondent with Kuroki’s army, “a machine gun was used with
-decisive effect.”
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IV
-
-EMPLOYMENT IN THE FIELD WITH THE PROTECTIVE CAVALRY
-
-
-Each army will usually be divided into several columns, each
-preceded by its advanced guard, the whole covered by the Protective
-Cavalry. The bulk of the latter will be scattered or remain
-concentrated according to the size of the zone in which it is to
-operate, the nature of the ground, and the first dispositions of
-the enemy. The veil thus formed will only be torn aside when the
-artillery and infantry of the advanced guards open fire.[11]
-
-It is probable that the side which is weak in cavalry will dispense
-with Independent Cavalry altogether, and will meet the Independent
-Cavalry of the enemy with their Protective Cavalry supported by
-machine guns. The Japanese, who were outnumbered by six to one,
-were unable to use Independent Cavalry, and during the early stages
-of the war supported their cavalry by infantry. The Russians, who
-possessed masses of cavalry, used them principally as Protective
-Cavalry, if we except the raids made by the Division under
-Lieutenant-General Mishchenko after the fall of Port Arthur. The
-Protective Cavalry will therefore, in such a case, not only have to
-prevent the enemy’s Independent Cavalry from obtaining information
-by penetrating their screen, but will also have the task of
-obtaining information as to the enemy’s numbers and direction of
-march. That they are able to do this even in the face of greatly
-superior numbers has been proved by the Japanese, whose cavalry,
-outnumbered and badly horsed as they were, succeeded throughout the
-war in a remarkable degree in penetrating the enemy’s screen and
-obtaining information. The Russians, on the other hand, in spite of
-their masses of cavalry, failed not only to destroy the diminutive
-force opposed to them, but even to penetrate their thin veil or
-obtain any information of what was taking place behind it.
-
-Are we not in precisely the same position as the Japanese in our
-numerical weakness in cavalry, and should we not be confronted by
-the same problem in the event of war with a military nation?
-
-Let us, then, see how the Japanese Protective Cavalry was able to
-fulfil its mission in spite of the vastly superior numbers of its
-opponents. In the first place the Japanese cavalry is trained in
-the orthodox cavalry spirit, which is highly developed; suppleness
-and power to manœuvre for the delivery of the attack is the chief
-aim, while the charge is regarded as the culmination of manœuvre.
-Swordsmanship, horsemanship, and independent scouting are the
-features of individual training, while only thirty rounds per
-annum are fired in the musketry course, from the carbine with
-which they are armed in addition to the sword. The consequence is
-that the whole cavalry is saturated with a spirit of enterprise
-and daring, and a firm belief in its superiority to all other arms
-in manœuvre and offence. It was this spirit and confidence that
-enabled them, when outnumbered and deprived of their swordsmanship,
-to retain their dash and mobility, while using their carbines from
-behind village walls against the hosts they were unable to ride
-down. It must be remembered that the Japanese had practically
-no machine guns at the beginning of the war, and those hastily
-purchased after hostilities broke out were required at Port
-Arthur. Consequently, the Japanese had to solve the problem of
-how to oppose the masses of Russian cavalry with their few but
-highly trained squadrons, and their solution was to hold up the
-Russian cavalry by fire on every possible occasion, and to be
-held up by them as seldom as possible. For this purpose they were
-closely supported by infantry; and it is of interest to remember
-how our own light infantry were used in much the same way in the
-Peninsula--the 13th Light Infantry being actually mounted for the
-purpose. Can we ignore the lesson? Is it not plain that machine
-guns would not only have done the work of the carbine and rifle
-far more effectively, but instead of depriving the cavalry of much
-of their mobility and preventing them from being made full use
-of--as undoubtedly was the case--they would have enabled them to
-go anywhere with the certainty of being able to defend themselves
-against a greatly superior force of cavalry.
-
-The action of Protective Cavalry on a large scale is so similar to
-that of Independent Cavalry--especially in the matter of patrols
-and contact squadrons--that it will be unnecessary to reconsider
-these duties. In speaking of the duties of the Protective
-Cavalry, _Field Service Regulations_, 1909, Part I., Chapter V.,
-observes: “These functions of the Protective Cavalry will entail
-principally defensive action, and will necessitate extension over
-a considerable front; but the commander must dispose his force in
-sufficient depth to enable it, with the assistance of the advanced
-guards of the columns in rear, to check any attempt to break
-through and surprise the main body.”
-
-It is obvious that fire action is here indicated, and a preceding
-paragraph states that mounted infantry will usually accompany the
-Protective Cavalry, though it is to be doubted if it will be found
-possible to provide horses for this purpose in time of war.
-
-Machine guns, however, will provide the necessary fire power
-without requiring many men or horses, and the use of a few extra
-batteries of machine guns with the Protective Cavalry would give
-them all the stiffening and defensive power of infantry without
-detracting from their mobility as cavalry. If the Japanese have
-taught us anything, it is this--that our cavalry, small as it is,
-if properly supported by strong and well-trained batteries of
-mobile machine guns, will be able to more than hold its own against
-greatly superior numbers in a European campaign. To attain such an
-end we should at once organise cavalry machine-gun batteries, and
-attach two batteries to each brigade in addition to the guns they
-already possess. This would give each cavalry brigade the fire
-power of a battalion of infantry (900 rifles), while in no way
-detracting from their mobility, as they would only occupy the road
-space of two extra squadrons, and move just as rapidly over any
-country. The alternative is to follow Colonel Zaleski’s advice and
-attach two machine guns to each squadron, which would give the same
-number of guns, but would be likely to detract from the efficiency
-of both guns and squadrons. We are, however, dealing with existing
-organisation, and, however much we may desire to increase the
-efficiency of our Protective Cavalry, we have only one battery of
-six guns with each brigade instead of the visionary three. Let us
-see how we may use them to the best advantage.
-
-Supposing the Protective Cavalry to consist of one brigade, they
-will probably be extended to form a screen over a considerable
-front. The exact formation and method of advance will entirely
-depend upon the proximity of the enemy, his strength, and the
-nature of the country. We will suppose the country open and both
-flanks exposed and the enemy in the immediate vicinity, the
-contact squadrons or patrols having gained touch with him. The
-duties of the Protective Cavalry are the tactical reconnaissance,
-and the occupation of positions of tactical importance to the
-infantry and artillery.
-
-With so small a number of machine guns as a single battery, it will
-be necessary to decide where they may be most usefully employed,
-and a great deal must depend on the particular situation. If the
-tactical reconnaissance is incomplete, they may be used in the
-first instance to hold the enemy in front while the squadrons move
-round the flanks to complete the information required. If used in
-this manner, they must be handled with dash, and, working in widely
-extended pairs--two in the centre and two on each flank--must push
-forward and try to surprise the enemy in close formation, moving
-from position to position and never remaining stationary after
-fire has been opened, provided cover exists to hide movement. Six
-guns co-operating in a vigorous offensive, unopposed by artillery,
-can push up to close range and do immense damage, while the enemy
-should be quite unable to decide what numbers are opposed to him.
-A ridge, a gully, a road with good hedges parallel to the front,
-is sufficient to conceal the movement of machine guns; and as they
-have nothing to fear from cavalry and can always retire if galled
-by rifle fire, they can dominate the situation if handled according
-to the principles already laid down for them.
-
-Where the tactical reconnaissance has already been completed and
-the principal object is to protect the force covered, machine guns
-will be found most valuable to support the flanks should an attempt
-be made to turn them, as their mobility enables them to be sent to
-a distant point with great rapidity, and their concentrated fire at
-once makes itself felt at a threatened point and turns the scale
-in a fire fight with astonishing suddenness. This mobility renders
-them particularly suitable for seizing and holding positions until
-the main body comes up.
-
-When used for this duty the battery or section commander, as the
-case may be, should receive definite orders as to the importance
-of the position he is sent to hold and how long he is expected to
-remain there. The position should be carefully reconnoitred by
-scouts before the guns approach it, and steps should be taken at
-once to entrench the guns and teams against artillery fire if the
-position is to be held for any time. Alternative positions for
-each gun, with concealed approaches, should be constructed, and
-the guns carefully hidden by erecting screens in front of them, or
-by placing them behind bushes, which are then cut almost through
-the stem, so that they can be instantly removed to open fire.
-Ranges must be taken and carefully written down, with their compass
-bearings to conspicuous marks. The flanks must be protected, and
-dead ground made good by posting one gun to sweep it. The gun
-horses and detachment not on duty should be posted well to the
-flank and rear where they can obtain the best shelter from view and
-fire. Signalling communication should be established with the rear
-and flanks when possible.
-
-Very definite instructions must be given as to when and on what
-targets fire is to be opened, and the temptation to fire at patrols
-or small bodies of the enemy must be resisted. Fire should only be
-opened in the first instance by the order of the senior officer
-present, and in all cases should be reserved as long as possible.
-
-The battery of machine guns may also be used during the cavalry
-combat as already described in the last chapter, and when used as
-a reserve on a flank, should take up “positions of observation” if
-the ground permits, from which they can repulse a flank attack,
-while remaining ready to move off at a moment’s notice to any point
-where they may be required.
-
-Machine-gun commanders with the Protective Cavalry must bear
-in mind that their object must always be to help their cavalry
-in attaining the end in view, be it reconnaissance, attack, or
-resistance, and that close co-operation with the cavalry commander
-is essential. The most brilliant action causing loss or defeat to a
-portion of the enemy is useless if it does not directly further the
-object of the Protective Cavalry; and if we are unable to give here
-many examples from recent campaigns, it is principally due to this
-want of co-operation and consequent inability to make effective use
-of the machine guns.
-
-The report made by Captain Golochtchanov, who commanded a
-detachment of six machine guns attached to the 11th Orenburg
-Cossacks during the last few months of the war, contains a vivid
-description of the reconnaissance of the Japanese position made on
-August 14th, 1905, at Sitasi, by the regiment forming the advanced
-guard of Major-General Grêkow. “At about 4 a.m. the Russian cavalry
-attacked the Japanese outposts, consisting of three companies of
-infantry and two squadrons. While waiting for the situation to be
-cleared up, the machine guns were kept in reserve. Two and then
-four were sent against the enemy’s flank; the Japanese retired
-from position to position. At one o’clock the fight stopped; the
-Russians had carried three villages and determined the line and
-direction of the enemy’s trenches. Their task was accomplished. On
-the Russian side there were only 100 rifles in the firing line,
-with four machine guns.”[12]
-
-“Instead of marching at a uniform rate and distance in front of
-the main army it may be advantageous at times for portions of the
-Protective Cavalry to move rapidly forward to some natural feature,
-such as a ridge or river, along which it will establish posts of
-observation, the intervening country being watched by patrols, the
-line being divided into sections with suitable supports for each.
-The remainder of the force will continue to maintain a line of
-observation in rear, until the new line of observation is taken
-up; it will then concentrate and move up to support the latter, or
-pass through it to form a more advanced line.”[13]
-
-When this method of advance is used the machine guns working as
-independent sections should be used to hold important features,
-such as bridge-heads, defiles, passes, and villages in the line of
-observation. If positions are carefully selected whence effective
-fire can be brought to bear on points which the enemy must pass in
-close order, and the usual procedure as to cover, concealment, and
-range-taking is observed, the mounted troops may be spared much
-fatigue and given opportunities for resting men and horses.
-
-
-USE OF MACHINE GUNS IN A RETREAT
-
-During the battle the Protective Cavalry will be used in the way
-already described in the previous chapter, in which we also dealt
-with the Pursuit; we will therefore now see how they may be used to
-assist a Retreat.
-
-“When retreat appears inevitable the routes to the rallying
-position should never be so close to the battlefield as to come at
-once under the fire of the enemy. It should be occupied as soon as
-possible by some portion of the artillery, and by complete infantry
-units. _The cavalry and other mounted troops, aided by a strong
-force of artillery, will meanwhile check the enemy’s advance_,
-and the remainder of the force, with the exception, if possible,
-of a rear guard in support of the mounted troops, will move as
-rapidly as possible to the shelter of the rallying position and
-there reorganise. Steps should be taken immediately to secure any
-bridges, defiles, or other vital points on the line of retreat,
-at which the enemy’s mounted troops might intercept the force.
-Commanders of retreating troops must recognise that their greatest
-danger will arise from attacks in flank delivered by the enemy’s
-mounted troops and horse artillery; if possible, therefore, they
-should take precautions that _all ground commanding their line
-of retreat is occupied by flank guards_.”[14] The action of the
-Protective Cavalry is indicated in the first paragraph quoted in
-italics, while the second gives the only method by which a retreat
-can be rendered successful or secure. In no phase of modern war
-are machine guns so valuable as during a retreat, and it is quite
-probable that, properly organised and handled, they may make the
-pursuit so difficult and costly as to render the retreat a far
-less dangerous undertaking than it has been in the past. It is not
-difficult to realise that an arm possessing such great mobility,
-together with rapidity and concentration of fire, before which no
-closed bodies can exist at effective range, will be able not merely
-to check and delay pursuing cavalry, but may even prevent any
-effective pursuit by mounted men alone.
-
-The lack of machine guns on the side of the Russians in the late
-war renders this point still to be proved by a future campaign; but
-it is well known that the machine guns with the 1st Siberian Army
-Corps constantly checked the Japanese pursuit, and more than once
-rendered a flanking movement abortive.
-
-The moment that it is evident that a retreat is necessary it
-will be the duty of the Protective Cavalry commander immediately
-to collect all his cavalry, with a view to checking the enemy’s
-advance, and at the same time he should apply to the G.O.C. for
-as many machine guns as he can spare, and this is certainly the
-occasion when all the mounted machine-gun batteries should be sent
-to the commander of the rear guard.
-
-The first step will be to allot one or more batteries to the troops
-forming the two flank guards and to the main guard covering the
-centre. The general situation at this moment will of course govern
-their use. “The commander will determine, in accordance with the
-features of the ground, whether delay is best brought about by
-the occupation of positions blocking or flanking the enemy’s line
-of advance and the employment of fire action, or by a vigorous
-and timely attack by a body of horsemen. Frequently, however,
-opportunities may be offered for acting wide on the flanks, where
-even the threat of a mounted attack or a sudden dash from ambush
-may cause the enemy’s pursuit to be delayed without the force
-becoming too deeply committed.”[15] In either case the important
-thing for machine guns to do at this stage is quickly to seize
-ground from which to bring effective fire to bear across a wide
-extent of front. Dealing first with the commander of the batteries
-allotted to the centre, he will consult the O.C. cavalry and
-arrange with him his plan of action. It is of the first importance
-to stop the forward movement of the enemy on the direct line of
-retreat, as this is the easiest line of pursuit and the one upon
-which the most shaken portion of the troops will be found. The
-probable course of action for the machine guns here will be to
-break up into sections and form a line along the nearest feature of
-ground immediately in rear, from which fire can be brought to sweep
-the front and check direct pursuit. The more broken the country and
-the more commanding the ridge or other features, the more effectual
-will be the check, for at this stage guns will certainly be
-prominent in the pursuit and shelter from their fire will be very
-necessary.
-
-The fact that the machine guns are working in pairs on a very wide
-front should make it exceedingly difficult for artillery to locate
-them, except singly, and thus it will take them a considerable time
-to silence more than one or two of the scattered line of guns.
-Alternative positions and the constant change to a fresh one after
-opening fire will render the majority of the machine guns capable
-of remaining in action until closely engaged by the infantry. This
-will cause considerable delay, and by the time a serious infantry
-attack develops the machine guns will be able to retire to a fresh
-position. In anticipation of this, the battery commanders will have
-sent scouts to the rear directly the guns are in position, and they
-should personally examine the new line to be taken up, and select
-the gun positions for each section. One scout should remain in the
-new position of each section and the other return to the gun horses
-of his section, to guide them when the moment for retiring takes
-place.
-
-The gun horses should be as near the guns in action as possible;
-but should the position be such that this is impossible without
-exposing the horses to fire, then all the spare rifles of the
-gun-team must be used to open rapid fire to conceal the fact that
-the gun is being moved. The guns of each section must arrange with
-each other to cover their own retirement, but the battery commander
-must issue the order in the first instance and will arrange which
-sections move first.
-
-Where the pressure is great and co-operation difficult, it may
-be advisable to retire by half sections along the whole front at
-the same moment; thus the right guns of sections may be ordered
-to retire on a given signal, while the left guns cover them by a
-heavy continuous fire. If this method of retirement is adopted, it
-will be necessary for the second position to be within long range
-of the first, which is not always advisable in covering a retreat.
-It will seldom be possible to select a concealed position in the
-early stages of the retreat, but it must be borne in mind that if
-a concealed position can be occupied, and fire reserved until the
-pursuing cavalry are at close range, the effect of such a surprise
-will do much to check the pursuit, and impose such caution on the
-enemy that they will hesitate to press on without those precautions
-which necessitate deployments and thus cause much delay.
-
-The machine guns allotted to the flanks should form the supports
-to the cavalry there; and if two batteries are available on each
-flank, one should accompany the cavalry to enable it to remain
-mounted, while they provide the fire action necessary to support it
-in the attack and to cover its retirement in the face of superior
-numbers. The detail of such action has already been given with
-the Independent Cavalry. The other batteries will break up into
-sections and move parallel to the line of retreat in single file
-at wide intervals, keeping touch with the cavalry by scouts on the
-outer flank. The object of this battery is to seize and hold good
-positions on the flank of the line of retreat until the main body
-has passed. The scouts of the rear section of this battery should
-get into touch with the scouts of the flank gun of the centre
-battery from time to time, to ensure proper co-operation between
-the various batteries.
-
-The importance of concealed positions from which to ambush the
-pursuers must not blind machine-gun commanders to the necessity
-for seizing and holding to the last possible moment, even at
-the risk of capture, every position from which the retreat can
-be effectually covered and the pursuit delayed. Should a river
-or other natural obstacle be encountered on the line of retreat,
-machine guns must freely sacrifice themselves in covering the
-retirement of the cavalry across the bridge or beyond the obstacle.
-
-Cavalry is the most costly of all arms, and cannot be replaced
-during a campaign; machine guns are the least expensive in
-proportion to their fire value, and the easiest to renew; they must
-consequently save the cavalry when they can, even if they sacrifice
-themselves in doing so.
-
-
-ESCORT TO ARTILLERY
-
-There is one important duty which machine guns are able to perform
-better than any other arm, and that is escorting artillery, but
-more especially horse artillery. When cavalry are detailed for
-this purpose they not only deprive squadrons of much-needed men,
-but can only provide three rifles in action to every four men of
-the escort, owing to the necessity of providing horse-holders. In
-addition to this drawback, the horses provide a costly fire-trap
-for the shells of the enemy’s guns which may go wide of the
-battery. For these reasons, where it is possible to spare them,
-a section of machine guns should be allotted to each battery of
-artillery when an escort is necessary.
-
-They should march in the rear of the battery when on a road, and
-on the outer flank when in open country and away from cavalry.
-The sole object of the machine guns is to afford protection to
-the battery from cavalry, and to prevent rifle fire from being
-brought to bear on them from effective range; therefore the section
-commander must devote his whole attention to this object, and he is
-not justified in opening fire on any target that does not directly
-threaten the battery--this especially applies to that stage of the
-mounted combat immediately before the collision, when the guns are
-firing on the opposing squadrons.
-
-The section commander will be under the immediate orders of the
-battery commander, and should be acquainted with his plans and
-intentions. He should remain with him until the position for
-action has been selected, when he will immediately seek the best
-position from which to cover the guns, taking particular care
-not to mask or limit their radius of fire nor hinder their line
-of advance or retreat. This will necessitate a careful but rapid
-survey of the ground in the vicinity of the position, in which
-good ground scouts, who have been previously trained in this work,
-will materially assist. The most suitable positions will usually
-be found well to the front and on the inner flank of the battery
-from 200 to 600 yards’ distance. It may be occasionally possible to
-place a machine gun on each flank from which a cross fire can be
-brought to bear on ground in front of the guns; but such a position
-on either side of the battery, unless the ground is particularly
-favourable, has the disadvantage of rendering fire control
-difficult, and may hamper the fire or movement of the battery.
-The principal considerations which should govern the choice of a
-position are as follows:
-
-(1) Good field of fire to protect the battery from attack.
-
-(2) Position clear of the fire and movement of the battery.
-
-(3) Immunity from artillery firing on the battery.
-
-(4) Concealment.
-
-(5) Cover from fire.
-
-There should be no dead ground in front or on the flanks of the
-battery, and with two machine guns this condition can generally be
-satisfied. In cases where one flank remains exposed and cannot be
-protected by the fire of the machine guns, or where a portion of
-the front or one flank cannot be seen, scouts must be placed well
-out in this direction, where they can see anything approaching
-and signal timely warning of it, and a position must be selected
-beforehand to which to move a machine gun should the warning be
-given. It has already been pointed out in a previous chapter, and
-may be repeated here, that machine guns have nothing to fear from
-cavalry under any circumstances, and when in a selected position
-with ranges accurately known, as they would be in this case, a
-single gun properly handled could easily stop a squadron. When
-selecting the place for the led horses, it must be remembered that
-fire from the enemy’s guns is likely to search the reverse slopes
-of the position immediately in rear of the battery.
-
-The machine guns must not be re-horsed until after the battery
-has limbered up and moved off, as they are then most vulnerable.
-They should endeavour to come into action before the battery
-unlimbers--though this will seldom be possible with horse
-artillery.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER V
-
-EMPLOYMENT IN THE FIELD WITH INFANTRY
-
-
-The employment of machine guns with infantry seems at first sight
-to be obvious, for they fire the same ammunition and have the
-same range and kinetic effect. Nevertheless the first machine
-gun was used by the French in 1870 as artillery, and its name
-“mitrailleuse” indicates “grape shot” rather than rifle bullets.
-This initial error in its tactical employment, together with its
-crude mechanism, artillery carriage, and short range (about 500
-yards), enabled the artillery to silence it early in the battle, so
-that it rarely proved of any use.
-
-On the few occasions when it was concealed from the artillery
-and used at short range against the infantry, its effect was as
-astonishing as it was decisive. At Gravelotte several batteries of
-mitrailleuses concealed near St. Hubert’s Farm reserved their fire
-until the attacking infantry was on the glacis within close range.
-The result was decisive, and the German attack was repulsed with
-terrific loss. Again at Mars la Tour, the German official account
-describes the repulse of the 38th Prussian Brigade by mitrailleuse
-batteries placed on the crest of the hill, as causing them such
-losses as to amount almost to annihilation. The brigade lost more
-than half its numbers and two-thirds of its officers.
-
-When it is remembered that this mitrailleuse was not automatic, but
-had to be operated by hand, that it had 25 barrels and a maximum
-effective range of only 500 yards, and that it cheerfully engaged
-in the artillery duel at ranges between 2,000 and 4,000 yards,
-the only wonder is that, having accomplished so much, the reasons
-for its failure were not immediately apparent, and that it has
-taken nearly forty years to convince the world that tactics are
-as necessary for the effective employment of machine guns as for
-infantry. The general principles for their tactical employment have
-already been dealt with in Chapter II., but they are so excellently
-condensed in Sect. 187 of the German Regulations, that at the risk
-of repetition they may be quoted here.
-
-“Machine guns enable commanders to develop at fixed points the
-maximum volume of infantry fire on the smallest possible front.
-Machine guns can be employed over any country that is practical
-for infantry, and when they are unlimbered they must be able to
-surmount considerable obstacles. In action they offer no greater
-target than riflemen fighting under like conditions, and they can,
-in proportion to their fire value, support far greater losses than
-infantry. They can utilise all cover that infantry are able to use.
-Cover which is barely sufficient for a section of infantry (60
-men) can protect an entire machine-gun detachment (six guns).”
-
-In order to see in more detail how machine guns should be employed
-with infantry and the limitations of their tactics, it will be
-necessary to follow the sequence of the infantry combat in attack
-and defence, and to assume such situations as seem likely to arise.
-
-
-ADVANCED GUARDS
-
-The action of the infantry of an advanced guard will follow the
-same lines whatever the dimensions of the force, and the battalion
-is a convenient unit with which to deal. There are four battalions
-in a brigade, and three brigades in a Division; consequently the
-Divisional General will have six batteries of four guns each, or 24
-machine guns, under his command. We will assume that the battalion
-we are dealing with forms the advanced guard of its brigade, and
-that the Brigadier has given it a battery of four machine guns, two
-of which will probably belong to the battalion.
-
-_Field Service Regulations_, 1909, page 79, says: “An advanced
-guard is divided into a vanguard and a main guard.... The special
-duty of the vanguard is reconnaissance. It will therefore generally
-be composed of the advanced guard mounted troops, with or without a
-body of infantry as a support. By day, when the country is open and
-the advanced guard is strong in mounted troops, infantry will not
-as a rule form part of the vanguard.... The main guard comprises
-the troops of the advanced guard not allotted to the vanguard.”
-
-We will first take the case of infantry with the vanguard as a
-support to the mounted troops, and suppose that two companies are
-allotted for this duty and have been given a section of machine
-guns. The formation of the infantry of the vanguard will largely
-depend on the nature of the country and the proximity of the enemy.
-Where the country is open plain they will probably be extended in
-a long line of skirmishers, in which case the machine guns should
-march close in rear of the centre on the road. Should the country
-be close or broken, the vanguard infantry may be confined to the
-road--with small parties pushed out to the front and flanks--in
-which case the machine guns should march in rear of the advanced
-party, and not in rear of the vanguard. It must be remembered
-that machine guns are able to come into action and open a heavy
-and accurate fire in less time than it would take infantry of
-equal fire power to deploy and to open fire from a position; it is
-therefore the machine guns of the vanguard that should be the first
-to open fire and give the infantry time to deploy and find fire
-positions. When the enemy is encountered the object of the vanguard
-infantry must be to support the cavalry as quickly as possible, and
-enable them to mount and push forward round the flanks.
-
-The section commander must go forward at once with scouts from
-each gun, and quickly grasp the situation, consulting the officer
-commanding the troops engaged as to the action to be taken; he must
-then select the positions for his guns to come into action. The
-scouts should take ranges and have everything ready for the guns to
-open fire on arrival. The moment the guns open fire, the section
-commander should send scouts off to find alternative positions to
-the front and flank from which it may appear possible to enfilade
-the enemy. Should the target be unsuitable, _e.g._ a line of
-well-concealed skirmishers, etc., fire must be _reserved_, and the
-guns should take up positions of observation while the section
-commander and scouts seek for a position on the flanks from which
-to bring an effective fire.
-
-As soon as the vanguard infantry are deployed the section commander
-must co-operate with them entirely, and must take his instructions
-from the vanguard commander, who should leave him a free hand,
-merely telling him his intentions and how the guns may best assist
-him.
-
-When the main guard comes up, in the case where the vanguard is
-checked, the section commander should take the earliest opportunity
-of placing himself under the battery commander, and at this stage
-the guns should be used to seize and hold positions of importance,
-especially artillery positions. If the advanced-guard action
-discloses the fact that the main body of the enemy has been
-encountered, and the G.O.C decides to engage, the advanced guard
-will be required to seize all positions of tactical value and to
-hold off the enemy until the main body has had time to arrive and
-deploy. Their action will vary according to whether the G.O.C.
-decides to act on the offensive or defensive. The latest German
-Regulations say: “On becoming engaged, that side will have the
-advantage which gains the start over its opponents in readiness
-for action, and thus reaps the benefit of the initiative.” No arm
-is better able to assist in this than the machine gun, and every
-available battery should be brought up at this stage to take part
-in the advanced-guard engagement.
-
-The Germans say: “The advanced guard will fight on a wider front
-than that ordinarily allotted to a force of its size, so as to
-seriously engage the enemy. It will be disposed in groups more or
-less detached, which will occupy those positions the possession of
-which will most protect the deployment of the main body. _It will
-be assisted by detachments of machine guns, which will be placed
-for preference on those positions which it is most necessary to
-prevent the enemy from capturing._”[16]
-
-The commander of the machine guns of the advanced guard is
-under the immediate orders of the O.C. advanced guard, and must
-co-operate with him throughout the engagement. All officers with
-machine guns must remember that isolated action is useless, and
-that however effective their fire may be locally, unless it
-directly furthers the object of the action, it is an unjustifiable
-waste of fire power.
-
-The seizure of ground likely to be of use to the main
-body--particularly artillery positions--must be the first
-consideration of machine guns with the advanced-guard infantry,
-once the infantry are in action. That they can hold these
-unsupported is certain. “There never has been and cannot be such
-a thing as a successful attack on a line of machine guns in a
-favourable position in action, until the machine guns have been
-well battered by artillery fire,” says Lieutenant Parker in his
-book _Tactical Organisation and Uses of Machine Guns in the Field_.
-
-In the cases where the infantry of the advanced guard forms the
-main guard, the battery of machine guns should march with the
-foremost body of troops and should never march in rear, where they
-are useless, and where, if on a road, they can only be moved up
-with difficulty. The battery commander should remain with the O.C.
-advanced guard until he is fully acquainted with the situation
-and his intentions. Should the situation be such as to enable the
-advanced guard to brush aside the opposition, the machine guns must
-be used vigorously to support the infantry attack, and should be
-pushed forward to seize positions before the infantry deploy, and
-cover their deployment by fire. In the preliminary stages these
-positions will probably be on the immediate front, and the four
-guns should be able to occupy a front roughly coinciding with the
-first deployment of the infantry. As soon as the infantry come
-into action the machine guns may be withdrawn and used on the
-flanks to bring a cross fire to bear, and to fire on any closed
-bodies, led horses, etc., that may offer a target. At this stage
-the guns should work in pairs in mutual support, and may be used on
-one or both flanks as the situation requires.
-
-Machine guns should rarely be used in the firing line after the
-infantry deploy, as they offer a rather marked target and can be
-far more profitably employed in pressing the attack on the flanks.
-
-There are several instances of the successful use of machine guns
-with the advanced guard in South Africa in 1900 to support the
-mounted vanguard, and on many occasions they were able to brush the
-enemy aside without deploying the main guard or delaying the march
-of the column.
-
-
-THE ATTACK
-
-Under cover of the advanced-guard action and the subsequent
-artillery duel the infantry will deploy for the attack. The first
-advance of the infantry will probably be covered and supported by
-the artillery, and they will generally be able to push forward to
-within long range of the enemy’s infantry, without the necessity
-of covering their advance by rifle fire. From here, however, the
-firing line will begin to suffer from rifle fire, and it will be
-necessary to reply to this fire in order to cover the further
-advance.
-
-“To enable the attack to be prosecuted it is clear that from
-this moment the hostile fire must be met by fire of greater
-power, _its intensity and duration being dependent on the effect
-produced_. Moreover, from this point forward movement will as a
-rule be contingent on the mutual fire support afforded to one
-another by neighbouring bodies, and on the effects produced by
-the _covering fire brought to bear on the enemy’s line_ wherever
-the ground admits of such action, by supports, reserves, and the
-troops specially told off for this purpose. Covering fire should
-be delivered so as to strike the enemy, disturb his aim, and
-compel him to seek shelter when the assailant is exposed or in
-difficulties. _In such circumstances intensity of fire is of the
-first importance; but fire should be reserved when the assailants’
-progress is satisfactory, or when he is under cover._”[17]
-
-No one who has controlled the covering fire of infantry, even
-on manœuvres, will dispute the immense difficulty of timing
-the opening and ceasing of such a fire, with even a company,
-to coincide with the advance of the troops covered; while the
-necessity for observation of fire and its concentration on certain
-parts of the enemy’s position make it still more difficult
-effectively to cover the advance of troops with rifle fire at long
-range.
-
-That machine guns will be able to perform this duty far more
-effectively and easily than infantry is manifest from the nature
-of the fire required, the features being _intensity_, _control_,
-and _concentration_, all of which are characteristic of machine
-guns. When required to cover the advance of infantry, machine guns
-should be used in batteries and must be so placed that they are
-able to see the infantry they are covering, and to sweep those
-portions of the enemy’s position from which fire can be brought
-to bear on the advancing troops. If the enemy’s artillery is not
-silenced or at least dominated by that of the attackers, it will
-be necessary to conceal the machine guns from view and provide
-cover from fire. That machine guns well concealed and provided with
-cover (pits) are able to remain in action under artillery fire for
-considerable periods, is proved by instances in the Russo-Japanese
-War (see Chapter III. p. 28). Major Kuhn, who was with the Japanese
-Army in Manchuria, in his report states: “Importance is laid on
-concealing the guns, and it was claimed that none had been knocked
-out by the Russian artillery.” Covering fire from the flanks is
-more likely to be effective than frontal fire, because it will
-enfilade entrenchments, reach men behind natural cover and have a
-more disconcerting morale effect than frontal fire. It will not
-always be possible to find suitable fire positions on the flanks
-for machine guns at this stage of the attack, and it will then be
-necessary to place them in rear of the attacking infantry and fire
-over their heads. This can be done with perfect safety--indeed,
-there is far less danger of accidentally hitting the attacking
-infantry with machine guns than with artillery fire. Direct fire
-should only be used when it is impossible to use indirect fire on
-account of the nature of the ground in the vicinity.
-
-Indirect fire from the reverse slope of a hill has the advantage
-of concealing the guns and rendering them immune from artillery
-fire. The position must be carefully selected with due regard to
-the slope in its relation to fire from the enemy as laid down in
-chap. ii. p. 67, of _Training Manuals Appendix_, 1905. The best
-position is just below the crest of a steep slope, as observation
-of fire is rendered easier and the effect of shrapnel minimised.
-The safety of the infantry in front will depend entirely on the
-range, height of the guns above the infantry, and the position of
-the target (enemy). On level ground the range must not be less
-than 800 yards,[18] and the infantry will be perfectly safe at all
-distances between 200 yards from the guns and 200 yards from the
-enemy. (See table, Appendix A.) The methods of employing indirect
-fire have been given at the end of Chapter II., and its success
-will depend largely upon the careful observation of fire by the
-section commanders, who must concentrate their attention on this
-alone--the battery commander giving the signal for opening and
-ceasing fire, and the target or direction of fire for each section.
-Machine guns used as covering fire have ample time for preparation;
-and as ranges can be accurately taken, and great deliberation used
-in selecting positions, observing fire, and correcting errors, the
-maximum of accuracy should be attained. If the enemy is entrenched
-against frontal fire, good results may be expected from accurate
-distant fire, owing to the angle of descent of the bullet causing
-the low parapet or shallow trench to be no protection.
-
-They were successfully used by the Japanese as covering fire for
-infantry in the attack, as the following examples will show: “At
-Mukden on March 1st all the machine guns of a whole Japanese
-division (12 to 18 guns) were brought into action upon a Russian
-_point d’appui_. The Russian fire was silenced, but burst out again
-whenever the machine-gun fire slackened. The Japanese infantry used
-these pauses in the enemy’s fire to press forward to close range
-_under cover of their machine-gun fire_.”[19] On March 2nd the
-three machine guns of the 10th Japanese Infantry Regiment acted in
-the same way against a Russian fieldwork. This method of employing
-machine guns requires the closest co-operation with the infantry
-from the commencement of the attack.
-
-Again, during the Japanese attack on Namako Yama the infantry
-were greatly assisted by covering fire from their machine guns
-directed on the Russian trenches. These guns were used from behind
-_screens_, and their success was largely due to their being well
-concealed.
-
-It will rarely be advisable for machine guns to follow infantry
-into the firing line, where they present a conspicuous target
-which attracts fire and renders their withdrawal difficult.
-
-We made this mistake in the South African War more than once. At
-Rietfontein the machine-gun detachment of the Gloucester Regiment,
-which had followed the battalion into the firing line, was almost
-annihilated. At Modder River the Scots Guards Maxim gun accompanied
-the firing line, and the detachment was annihilated by pom-pom
-fire, and the gun was left on the field alone all day.[20] In the
-attack on Cronje’s laager at Paardeberg, machine guns were used in
-the firing line on the left bank of the river, and when the attack
-failed the machine guns, having suffered severe losses, could not
-be withdrawn and had to be abandoned till nightfall.
-
-When the covering fire of machine guns is no longer considered
-necessary, they should be withdrawn and concentrated in batteries
-in rear of the reserve or in such other convenient position as the
-G.O.C. may direct. They should take this opportunity of refilling
-belts, replenishing ammunition, water, etc., and if the guns have
-fired many thousand rounds, of exchanging barrels.[21] They are
-now at the immediate disposal of the G.O.C. and will be used by
-him as a mobile reserve. Circumstances vary so in war that it is
-impossible to particularize in their use at this stage, but their
-great mobility will render them extremely valuable in the following
-cases:
-
-1. To assist a turning movement.
-
-2. To reinforce a distant flank.
-
-3. To repel a counter-attack.
-
-4. To hold a captured position.
-
-When the infantry reach close range, the point for the assault will
-have been selected and the reserves massed behind this point. When
-the reserves have been thrown in, and the fire fight has reached
-its height, the moment will have arrived when one side or the other
-will obtain superiority of fire. “_The climax of the infantry
-attack is the assault which is made possible by superiority of
-fire._”[22] To assist in the attainment of this superiority of
-fire is the true rôle of machine guns with infantry, and, as their
-beaten zone at short ranges is so small, they can safely fire
-over the heads of prone infantry, even when the latter are within
-a hundred yards of the target. The guns should now be pushed up
-to the closest ranges, and fire of the most rapid description
-concentrated on the point of assault. When it is remembered that
-the machine guns of a single Infantry Division, as at present
-organised, can bring a fire of more than ten thousand shots a
-minute from close range where its accuracy is assured, at this
-crisis, there will be no need to say any more on the tactical
-importance of the probable result.
-
-In bringing machine guns into action for this purpose, they will
-generally be used in batteries, but may come into action in
-sections or even single guns once the objective has been pointed
-out. The object being to obtain superiority of fire regardless of
-cost, rapidity and concentration of fire must be the principal
-points. The guns must therefore press forward to the closest
-range, and where it is possible to bring a cross or enfilading
-fire to bear, the opportunity must not be neglected. It may be
-necessary to fire over the heads of the infantry or even to push
-guns into the firing line itself, though this is seldom desirable
-if good positions can be found in rear. When any portion of the
-line advances to the assault, fire must be concentrated over their
-heads on the position assaulted; and when they are so close to
-the position as to render such fire impossible, fire must not
-cease, but be directed over the position so as to strike the enemy
-as they retreat. Fire from machine guns may be kept up from 500
-yards’ range over the heads of prone infantry within 100 yards of
-the target with perfect safety, and from 800 yards over infantry
-advancing to within the same distance. General Nogi, speaking of
-the use of machine guns in the attack, says: “Our troops trained
-machine guns on the most advanced lines of infantry _to overwhelm
-with fire the points at which resistance was greatest_. Sacks of
-earth were used to mask them. _They have often enabled the infantry
-to advance with success._” M. Ullrich, war correspondent of the
-_Gazette de Cologne_, was present in many engagements in which
-machine guns were pushed up to support the firing line in the final
-stage. He says: “In the offensive the Japanese frequently made
-successful use of machine guns. _When the infantry were carrying
-out a decisive attack, they were supported by their machine guns,
-which concentrated their fire on points arranged beforehand_....
-When machine guns have been skilfully employed, their action has
-been infinitely more effective than that of field artillery, more
-especially when they fire at infantry ranges.” The following is
-an example of their actual use in this way. “The Japanese,” says
-a Russian eye-witness of the fighting round Mukden, “brought up
-during the night dozens of machine guns with hundreds of thousands
-of cartridges to their front line of skirmishers, from 400 to 500
-yards from our positions, and entrenched them there. _When the
-assault commenced, at dawn, the machine guns opened fire with fatal
-accuracy on the parapets of our trenches and on our reserves_,
-preventing them from coming up. We could do nothing with the enemy,
-because when the machine guns showed the least vulnerability, they
-were at once protected by shields of bullet-proof steel.”[23]
-
-The machine guns of the enemy will all be in action during the
-final stages, but they should not be engaged by the machine guns
-of the attack except when exposed. They are very difficult to put
-out of action by small-arm fire at any time, and when employed by
-the defence are sure to be well concealed and provided with cover.
-It is the duty of the artillery to silence machine guns, and this
-was so far recognised in the war between Russia and Japan that
-the latter brought up mountain guns on more than one occasion to
-silence the Russian machine guns.
-
-At Kinsan on June 26th, 1905, when the Japanese were attacking the
-position, the Russians brought up two machine guns against the
-43rd Regiment and a mountain battery at 3 p.m. The battery at once
-silenced the machine guns, and by 5.30 p.m. the hill was in the
-hands of the Japanese.[24] Captain Niessel, of the Russian Army,
-gives another instance. “It was on August 31st at 7 p.m. that the
-Japanese decided to drive the machine guns out of the village of
-Goutsiati by _artillery fire_. Knowing that their infantry had been
-checked, they posted at the village of Datchaotsiati a battery
-which showered on us shrapnel and high explosive shell. Although
-the men had taken cover behind a wall of earth, we had many wounded
-and could not breathe freely until nightfall, when the enemy
-ceased their fire, to which _we could not reply on account of the
-distance_. At 9 p.m. I was ordered to evacuate the position.”[25]
-
-The moment the infantry assault is successful, the machine guns
-must be pushed forward into the captured position to secure the
-ground gained and to repel counter-attacks. As the confusion at
-this moment will be considerable, it will seldom be possible for
-the machine-gun commander to receive orders from the G.O.C., but
-this must not prevent him from immediately directing guns to occupy
-and quickly entrench themselves in positions which it may appear
-vital to secure, and to order the remainder of the guns not so
-required to follow and fire on the enemy wherever he may show signs
-of rallying. In order that these two distinct duties may be carried
-out instantly and without confusion, it will be advisable to tell
-off beforehand those batteries that are to pursue the enemy.
-
-Theoretically every available gun should be launched in the
-pursuit, but the recent war between Russia and Japan has shown
-how often a position that has been stormed and captured has been
-retaken by a rapid counter-attack before the attackers have had
-time to rally and prepare to hold what they have taken. Machine
-guns can render a position safe from counter-attack so quickly and
-effectually that this duty should be the _first_ consideration of a
-machine-gun commander with infantry in the assault.
-
-Fresh ammunition must be brought up, and every endeavour made to
-conceal the guns and construct good cover from any material found
-in the position.
-
-“During the battle of Mukden, on the evening of March 1st, a
-position at Sha-shan was captured by the Japanese. The Russians
-had taken up another position some 500 yards in rear, from which
-they opened an effective fire upon the Japanese infantry in the
-captured position. Another Russian force about 1,000 yards
-further to the west threatened their flank. The Japanese, however,
-succeeded in bringing up _the machine guns which had taken part in
-the attack, and brought them into action under cover of a number of
-sandbags abandoned by the Russians_. The effect was decisive: all
-counter-attacks failed before the annihilating fire of the machine
-guns.”[26]
-
-
-IN THE DEFENCE
-
-When infantry are acting on the defensive, it is advisable that the
-majority of the machine guns should be held in reserve, and used to
-check turning movements, to reinforce distant portions of the line
-of defence, and to deliver counter-attacks, but their principal
-rôle will be the repelling of the assault. Guns allotted for this
-purpose must be placed in very carefully selected positions in the
-line of defence, from which they can command narrow approaches,
-and sweep ground in front of trenches or important works by cross
-fire, especially any dead ground likely to afford temporary cover
-to the attackers. Concealment is of the first importance, and cover
-from fire absolutely necessary, but the combination of the two
-requires great skill both in choosing positions and in constructing
-an inconspicuous shelter. In certain positions where the country
-is flat or undulating and has no abrupt features, pits will be
-found the best form of cover; but where the ground presents
-marked features, emplacements providing overhead cover will not
-only conceal the guns, but render them immune from shrapnel. The
-Japanese used these emplacements with great success, the guns often
-remaining concealed even when the enemy were within 300 yards.
-
-The positions for machine guns should not be in one and the same
-line, and they should be placed at wide intervals. At least two
-positions should be provided for each gun, and a second series
-of positions in rear, commanding those in front, should also be
-provided. The machine guns should be allotted to their positions by
-sections, each gun being so placed that its fire crosses that of
-the other when possible. Section commanders should be responsible
-for having all ranges from their respective positions taken and
-written up in each emplacement. They must arrange with the O.C. of
-that portion of the position to which they are allotted the time
-and signal (if any) for opening fire; the exact moment should be
-left to the discretion of the section commander as a rule, the O.C.
-merely indicating the stage of the attack up to which fire is to be
-reserved, and great care should be taken not to open fire before
-this stage has been reached. Every endeavour should be made to
-ensure co-operation between the machine-gun units in reserving fire
-till the shortest range has been reached by the attack and a really
-good target presented. Nothing can justify a machine gun opening
-fire from a concealed position until its fire will give the best
-results that can be expected from that place, and to ensure this
-it is necessary that the target is big and vulnerable, the range
-close, and the fire unexpected by the enemy. Captain von Beckmann,
-speaking of the Russo-Japanese War, says: “Premature fire upon
-unsuitable targets at long range is to be deprecated. The greater
-the surprise, and the shorter the time within which heavy loss is
-inflicted, the greater the morale effect produced. At the battle
-of Hai-kou-tai on January 27th, 1905, a Japanese company attacked
-Sha-shan. Four Russian machine guns _opened fire at about 1,100
-yards upon the extended firing line, without causing any serious
-loss or affecting its advance_. On the other hand, the Japanese
-on March 1st had _approached to within 200 or 300 yards_ of the
-Russian position at Wang-chia-wo-pang and were beginning the final
-assault. Two Russian machine guns _suddenly came into action_, and
-the Japanese assault _was repulsed with heavy loss_ owing to the
-annihilating fire.”
-
-These two instances well illustrate the right and wrong way of
-using machine guns in the defence. Where a battery is allotted to
-one section of the defence the guns should be distributed two or
-four along the front and one or more on each flank. Single guns
-may be used in the defence where a section cannot be spared, as
-the assistance of a supporting gun is not essential to its safety
-when behind entrenchments. In the first instance guns may be kept
-in rear of the position until the direction of the attack has
-been ascertained, provided they are able to occupy their positions
-unseen.
-
-Machine guns at salients and on the flanks are of great value in
-defending a position.
-
-If sufficient machine guns are available, one or two batteries
-should be reserved for the counter-attack. They should in this
-instance be pushed right into the firing line when necessary and
-used with the greatest boldness. It will be their duty to cover the
-retirement of the Infantry in the event of a repulse, and for this
-purpose positions in rear should have been selected beforehand.
-
-Although the principle of reserving machine guns in the defence
-must be strictly adhered to, there may be occasions when the use
-of a battery or two well in front of the defensive position will
-compel the enemy to deploy prematurely, cause him loss, and delay
-his advance. Machine guns so used may also find opportunities for
-surprising artillery while unlimbering, and thus render great
-service to the defence. They should be withdrawn when their mission
-is accomplished, and be reserved for further use as already
-indicated. The following are examples from the Russo-Japanese War
-of the use of machine guns in the defence of a position.
-
-General Nogi has written: “Our most formidable foes were wire
-entanglements placed 100 yards in front of the Russian trenches,
-well lit up by search-lights and covered by the murderous fire of
-machine guns. The defenders made use of them to flank dead ground
-in their front and also had them at other points, kept carefully
-in reserve and under good cover, to make use of continuous fire
-against the attackers at the moment of the assault.”
-
-“On January 28th, 1905, near Lin-chin-pu at about 7 p.m. the
-Japanese attacked the forts of Vosnesenski and the trenches near
-by, in which were posted two machine guns. _These latter opened
-fire at 200 or 300 yards on a Japanese company in line. In one or
-two minutes they fired about 1,000 rounds, and the Japanese company
-was annihilated._”[27]
-
-“At Mukden on March 1st, the left of a Japanese Division _being
-within 300 yards of the enemy’s position_ and about to assault,
-the Russians suddenly opened a very heavy machine-gun fire from
-cleverly concealed positions, _causing such loss that the Japanese
-attack was temporarily suspended_. On August 20th, 1904, the
-Japanese captured a lunette near the village of Shin-shi after
-severe fighting. _The Russians made a counter-attack with three
-machine guns, and drove the Japanese out again with a loss of over
-300._ The three machine guns retired from the lunette before the
-attackers got home, and, taking up a position behind the open gorge
-of the work, showered such a hail of bullets on the victorious
-Japanese that they were compelled to retire.”[28]
-
-“On February 27th, 1905, the Russians tried to surprise the
-railway bridge over the Sha-ho on a very clear night, when one
-could see as far as 500 yards. Four Japanese machine guns opened
-fire on a company of the 10th Light Infantry, which was almost
-wiped out.”[29]
-
-At the battle of Hei-kow-tai, the Russians at Shen-tan-pu made
-no less than five determined attacks against the Japanese
-entrenchments, in which was a machine gun, but were repulsed each
-time. The machine gun is said to have done great execution, and
-_one thousand dead Russians were reported to have been found before
-it_.[30]
-
-The 8th Division of the Japanese Army are reported to have made
-several fine attacks upon Hei-kow-tai, _but were each time repulsed
-mainly by the fire of the Russian machine guns_.[31] The same
-report says, “Throughout the campaign in Manchuria the Japanese
-have suffered severely in attacking those points of the Russian
-front which have been armed with machine guns,” and proceeds to
-quote an episode in the operations of the 5th Division at the
-battle of Mukden, to show to what lengths the Japanese went in
-order to silence these weapons. It appears that the Japanese were
-so galled by the fire of four machine guns that the attack was
-materially affected. They decided to bring up two mountain guns to
-within 500 yards of these machine guns, to try to destroy them.
-The mountain guns were brought up behind a wall and fired through
-two holes bored for the muzzles. Two machine guns were at once
-destroyed, but so well had the others been concealed that they were
-able to be withdrawn in safety.
-
-Sufficient has been quoted to show that both the Japanese and
-Russians made the greatest use of machine guns in the defence,
-and that when employed on sound tactical principles they not only
-afforded material assistance, but were often the predominant
-factor. On the other hand, when these principles were neglected
-or ignored, the machine guns merely wasted ammunition and were
-impotent to affect the situation. The lesson to be learned is this:
-_that machine guns are only useful when their tactical handling is
-thoroughly understood, and then their effect is more decisive than
-that of any other arm_.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VI
-
-EMPLOYMENT IN THE FIELD WITH INFANTRY (_contd._)
-
-
-THE RETREAT
-
-The reply of the British drummer-boy when asked by the great
-Napoleon to beat the “Retreat,” is historical, and, following the
-traditions of the British infantry, the word will not be found in
-the index of _Infantry Training_. Nevertheless, although British
-infantry never retreat, they may be called upon to perform that
-most difficult operation of war--“a retirement in the face of the
-enemy.”
-
-_Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909, speaking of the retreat
-says: “The cavalry and other mounted troops, aided by a strong
-force of artillery, will meanwhile check the enemy’s advance,
-and the remainder of the force, with the exception, if possible,
-of _a rear guard in support of the mounted troops_, will move as
-rapidly as possible to the shelter of the rallying position and
-there reorganise. Steps should be taken immediately _to secure any
-bridges, defiles, or other vital points on the line of retreat_
-at which the enemy’s mounted troops might intercept the force.
-Commanders of retreating troops must recognise that their greatest
-danger will arise from attacks in flank delivered by the enemy’s
-mounted troops and horse artillery; if possible, therefore, they
-should take precautions _that all ground commanding their line of
-retreat is occupied by flank guards_.”
-
-There are three distinct ways of employing machine guns with
-infantry to assist in covering the retreat, as will be seen from
-the portions of the above quoted in italics, viz. (1) With the rear
-guard. (2) To secure vital points on the line of retreat. (3) To
-occupy commanding positions on the flanks. The use of machine guns
-with the rear guard will be dealt with separately, so we will see
-how they should be employed to fulfil the two latter duties.
-
-Let us suppose that the moment has arrived when the commander of
-the force decides to break off the engagement and to effect a
-retreat. We have already seen how the cavalry and their machine
-guns will co-operate, and we may assume that their intervention
-will enable the infantry to break off the fight under cover of the
-fire of the rear guard and their machine guns. In anticipation
-of this, the commander of the machine-gun batteries--other than
-those allotted to the rear guard--will assemble them in a central
-position and receive from the commander of the force his plan of
-action and instructions for the co-operation of the machine guns.
-These instructions should definitely state the positions to be
-occupied on the line of retreat, and for how long such positions
-are to be held (_e.g._ until the infantry are past such-and-such a
-place, or to the last possible moment, etc.); but they should leave
-all details as to unit of guns, fire positions, opening fire,
-etc., to the machine-gun commander, who should be given a free hand
-in carrying out his instructions. The machine-gun commander will
-then issue his orders to battery commanders, allotting the battery
-for the flank and the battery which is to occupy positions on the
-line of retreat. In like manner the battery commander will tell off
-sections to occupy certain positions, if these have already been
-selected, and if not he will direct his battery to a position of
-readiness and will gallop off with his section commanders to select
-the positions for each section and explain the course of action to
-be taken. The position of readiness must be in the vicinity of the
-position to be occupied, and section commanders must take steps to
-ensure that their sections keep in signalling connection with them
-and can be brought up by signal to the position selected.
-
-The choice of the position will depend upon the nature of the
-country and the features favourable to delaying the enemy, but it
-may be laid down that the machine guns should not be placed in
-one line, but should be broken up as much as possible, so that no
-two guns are at the same range. In the same way, guns placed in
-well-concealed positions on the lower slopes of hills should have
-the other guns of their sections higher up, where they can command
-a wide extent of country and at the same time cover the retirement
-of the guns below. All guns must be so placed that they can be
-_retired under cover of the ground immediately they move_. The
-guns on the higher ground will open fire at long range, and the
-opportunity may be afforded at this stage for using “deliberate”
-fire at the most rapid rate possible, in imitation of rifle fire,
-for the double purpose of concealing the guns and deceiving
-the enemy by causing them to believe that the position is held
-by infantry. The guns at the lower position should watch their
-opportunity for opening fire on a large and vulnerable target; but
-should none be presented, it is possible by reserving fire to catch
-the enemy in close formation should they press on when the guns
-have ceased fire, thinking the position has been vacated.
-
-It may be possible to surprise the enemy from close range at
-bridge-heads or on roads through defiles leading to the line of
-retreat, if guns are carefully concealed in positions commanding
-such approaches. Indeed, the opportunities for ambushing pursuing
-cavalry or infantry will be frequent during the early stages of a
-retreat, and no chance must be lost in making the enemy pay dearly
-for his temerity during the pursuit. One successful ambush by
-machine guns is worth more than the most stubborn stand, for it
-imposes caution as nothing else can; and caution in the pursuit
-means delay, and delay spells failure. When machine guns get a
-really good target at close range, the result is little short of
-annihilation, and the morale effect of such a heavy loss, totally
-unexpected and inflicted in a few moments, takes the life out of
-the pursuit more completely than even a long stand.
-
-The machine guns allotted to the flanks will find positions in
-the way already described. These positions must be chosen along
-the line of retreat so as to hold all ground from which fire can
-be brought to bear on the retreating columns, and from which the
-enemy can be successfully repulsed when he attempts to break
-through. If there has been time to form infantry flank guards, the
-machine guns will assist in strengthening their resistance, and
-in covering their withdrawal. When acting alone they should open
-fire on suitable targets at the longest ranges, but when supporting
-infantry they may be able to reserve fire and surprise the enemy
-from close range. Guns working together on a flank must keep in
-touch with each other by signal, and guns should work in sections
-in mutual support. A battery acting as a flank guard to a force
-retreating must be prepared to occupy a front of some two or three
-miles, and sections will often be in positions a mile apart in
-open ground. Directly the guns have taken up positions the battery
-commander should go off with scouts from each gun and select fresh
-positions along the line of retreat. He will give the signal for
-retirement, and if in action at the time one gun of each section
-should move off first under cover of the fire of the others; or
-where the situation permits, a flank section may be ordered to move
-first. It must sometimes occur that the cavalry on the flanks will
-be compelled to retire by a superior force, and when this is the
-case machine guns in position may be able to inflict considerable
-loss, should the pursuing cavalry follow them too closely while
-retiring.
-
-As soon as it is known that the main body has reached the rallying
-position and is ready to hold it, the machine guns can be
-withdrawn. This will not usually be possible in daylight, and as a
-rule it will take place after dark. The dispositions of the machine
-guns in the rallying positions will be the same as in the case with
-infantry in the defence.
-
-
-REAR GUARDS
-
-The prime necessity for the machine guns with a rear guard of a
-retreating force is mobility, and without this they will be of
-little service and become a hindrance rather than a help.
-
-“A rear guard carries out its mission best by compelling the
-enemy’s troops to halt and deploy for attack as frequently and at
-as great a distance as possible. It can usually effect this by
-taking up a succession of defensive positions which the enemy must
-attack in turn. When the enemy’s dispositions are nearly complete,
-the rear guard moves off by successive retirements, each party as
-it falls back covering the retirement of the next by its fire.
-This action is repeated on the next favourable ground.... A rear
-guard may also effectually check an enemy by attacking his advanced
-troops as they emerge from a defile or difficult country.”[32]
-
-Machine guns, by reason of their concentrated fire and shallow
-beaten zone, are peculiarly suited for compelling troops to deploy
-at long range. They are also suited for quickly taking up a
-defensive position, and, when mobile, can instantly cease fire and
-move off in a few moments with considerable rapidity.
-
-Their power for suddenly developing an intense fire will enable
-them quickly to overwhelm an enemy caught “emerging from a defile
-or difficult country.” It would appear therefore that the machine
-guns are far more fitted than infantry to perform the duties of a
-rear guard as quoted above.
-
-“The first consideration in selecting a position for the artillery
-is that it shall be able to open fire on an enemy at long range,
-and thus compel his infantry to assume an extended formation at
-the greatest possible distance. The second is that it should be
-possible to withdraw without difficulty.”[33]
-
-When the infantry arrive within effective rifle range of the
-artillery, the latter will be compelled to retire, especially if
-the former are supported by cavalry. This will also be the moment
-when the infantry will require to retire to a fresh position in
-rear. Machine guns that have been well concealed, or which have
-taken up fresh positions in good cover in rear of the infantry
-line, should be able to unmask and by their fire hold off the enemy
-until both guns and infantry have effected their retreat. The
-facility with which they can traverse and sweep widely extended
-lines, and instantly concentrate fire on any portion of it, make
-them of great service in covering a retirement at effective range,
-as they can render the hottest fire ineffective and aimed fire
-impossible for a short time.
-
-Machine guns with a rear guard must be prepared to work from place
-to place with great rapidity, and for this purpose they must
-arrange to bring the gun horses close up to their fire position.
-Alternative positions are essential, but must be reached under
-cover and unobserved by the enemy. Sections will act independently,
-using their guns in mutual support; but the retirement of
-one section may often afford another the opportunity, from a
-well-chosen position on a flank, to surprise the enemy from close
-range as they press forward to occupy the abandoned position.
-
-A ruse that may sometimes be successful where guns are really well
-concealed is to bring up the gun horses and retire at a gallop
-by a pre-arranged signal all along the position, but leaving one
-gun of each section still in position but flat on the ground,
-where it will be completely concealed even from glasses. This is
-almost certain to draw a hot pursuit, especially if the artillery
-and infantry have retired previously, and if fire is reserved
-till close range a severe check may be administered to the enemy.
-“Skilfully laid ambushes will cause the enemy to move with caution
-in pursuit.”[34]
-
-Machine guns should never retire for a few hundred yards, except
-where absolutely necessary for covering the retirement of those in
-front. Once in position, they should only be moved to alternative
-positions when discovered, and these will usually be more or less
-on the same general alignment. When they retire they should move
-to such a distance in rear as to give them time to select, or
-if necessary improvise, good cover in the new positions and to
-replenish ammunition, etc. “The positions should be sufficiently
-far apart to induce the enemy, after seizing one, to re-form column
-of route before advancing against the next.”[35]
-
-General Alderson, speaking at the Aldershot Military Society in
-1904 and referring to the South African War, said: “I had two
-Maxims with tripod mountings on pack-saddles, which belonged to the
-1st Battalion Mounted Infantry. These guns had well-trained mounted
-detachments, and a pushing officer, with a good eye for ground, in
-command. _They were most useful, and more than once saved the flank
-of their unit from being turned by galloping up and coming into
-action on the flank of the out-flanking Boers_.... I am of opinion
-that if the most is to be got out of the guns, the detachments,
-_even with infantry_, should be mounted.... With the detachment
-mounted ... there is no question about the guns not keeping up, and
-they can be sent quickly to any desired position. They can hold on
-to any such position as long as required to _cover the advance or
-retirement of their infantry_, and then easily catch them up or get
-into another position. In fact, if the detachment is mounted the
-value of the guns is more than doubled.”
-
-Machine guns with the rear guard will certainly be exposed to
-artillery fire, and they will seldom have the time or opportunity
-for making sufficient cover to protect themselves. It will be
-necessary therefore either to withdraw the gun on coming under
-artillery fire or to find shelter from it. If good natural cover
-has been obtained, it will only be necessary to lower the gun flat
-on the ground behind it, and for the detachment to lie flat close
-against it, when they will be practically safe. The artillery will
-cease fire as soon as they find there is nothing to fire at, but
-the detachment should not move for some time after this, as the
-guns, having got the range, will be able to inflict considerable
-damage if the detachment exposes itself.
-
-It is always advisable to keep one or two sections in reserve with
-a rear guard to be used to protect the flanks or any point where
-the pursuit threatens to break through in the manner mentioned by
-General Alderson. These sections should remain with the rear-guard
-commander and be under his immediate command; they should be in
-readiness for instant action.
-
-
-OUTPOSTS
-
-The duties of the outposts are:
-
-(1) To provide protection against surprise.
-
-(2) In case of attack, to gain time for the commander of the force
-to put his plan of action into execution.[36]
-
-The first duty of outposts, which is _reconnaissance_, cannot
-be assisted by machine guns; but their second duty, which is
-_resistance_, may be materially strengthened and aided by them,
-as we have already seen in dealing with the defence. Little can
-be said about tactics, and it will be necessary to use the guns
-in positions on the line of resistance where their fire power is
-most likely to be of value. In order clearly to understand where
-and how machine guns should be used with outposts, it will be
-necessary first to examine the composition and distribution of
-outposts of a force of all arms. _Field Service Regulations_,
-Part I., 1909, says: “When there is any possibility of a force
-coming in conflict with an enemy, its commander, when halting for
-the night, should first decide on his dispositions in case of
-attack, and then arrange the quartering of his command and the
-position of the outposts accordingly.... Command, co-operation, and
-inter-communication will be facilitated by placing the advanced
-troops along well-defined natural features, such as ridges,
-streams, the outer edges of woods, etc., or in the vicinity of
-roads, but this must not be allowed to outweigh the necessity
-for making the best tactical dispositions possible. In enclosed
-country, and at night, the movements of troops are generally
-confined to the roads and tracks, which should be carefully
-watched. If the outpost position is extensive, it may be divided
-into sections, each section being numbered from the right. The
-extent of a section depends upon the amount of ground which can be
-supervised conveniently by one commander. The extent of frontage
-to be allotted to each company will depend on the defensive
-capabilities of the outpost position, and, where they exist, on
-the number of approaches to be guarded. The outpost position will
-invariably be strengthened and communications improved where
-necessary. Piquets and supports will do this without waiting for
-definite orders.... The outposts of a force of all arms consist of
-outpost mounted troops, outpost companies, and, where necessary,
-the reserve. Machine guns will generally be included and sometimes
-artillery.... When stationary, the duty of local protection will
-fall almost entirely on the infantry, most of the outposts mounted
-troops being withdrawn, their place in this case being with the
-reserve, if there be one. In certain cases, however, standing
-mounted patrols may be left out at night with advantage....
-
-“Machine guns with outposts may be employed to sweep approaches,
-and to cover ground which an enemy in advancing may be compelled to
-pass or occupy.”[37]
-
-Machine guns must be used on the principles given above, which
-naturally fall under two distinct headings, viz. use by day and
-use by night. Machine guns with outposts by day will not occupy
-their fire positions unless an attack is imminent, but should be
-posted with the reserves in their own section of the defence. This
-must not prevent emplacements or pits for the guns being made,
-ranges carefully taken and written up, and everything being ready
-in case of action. These positions and the subsequent action will
-correspond so closely with those already suggested for infantry in
-the defence in the last chapter, that they need not be repeated. By
-night, however, the case is very different, and it is necessary to
-select very carefully the position of each gun, so that it commands
-a road, a bridge, or other ground which the enemy in advancing may
-be compelled to pass or occupy. These places must be selected in
-order of importance, and an endeavour made to leave no approach by
-which a body of troops might move uncovered by fire. The machine
-guns must occupy their positions before dark and be carefully laid
-to sweep the area of ground necessary for protecting the position,
-the angle of elevation of the gun being taken by clinometer
-afterwards in order that it may be relaid if necessary in the dark.
-Great care must be taken to conceal these guns from observation
-when bringing them into position or withdrawing them, and it is
-worth while going to some considerable trouble to do this. One
-method of many is suggested to show what is meant. Field guns might
-be placed in the positions by day and withdrawn before night, the
-machine guns being brought up on the limbers and dropped in the
-position behind a screen of brushwood, and withdrawn again in the
-morning when the field gun is brought up.
-
-The detachment of each machine gun must find two double sentries
-and their reliefs, who will remain at their posts with the gun,
-which should have the belt ready in the feed block, but not
-actually loaded. These men may either take it in turn to stand to
-the gun or both be directed to watch. When there are no infantry
-sentries on piquet duty in front of the gun, it will be necessary
-to detail two who will be posted in the usual way some little
-distance in front of the gun to prevent it being rushed in the
-dark. The method of preparing the sights and laying the gun for
-night work is given in Chapter VII.
-
-The value of machine guns with the outposts at night is shown
-by an incident at the Battle of Mukden, March 6th, 1905. Two
-Russian battalions made a night attack against the hill north of
-Tung-chia-wen, which was occupied by the 2nd Japanese Regiment.
-There was no moon and the night was very dark. Two Japanese machine
-guns did great execution at ranges between 50 and 100 yards, and
-the Russians were repulsed with a loss of 450 men, the Japanese
-casualties being only 48.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VII
-
-EMPLOYMENT IN FORTRESS WARFARE
-
-
-The siege of Port Arthur by the Japanese and its defence by the
-Russians have thrown an entirely new light on Fortress Warfare.
-Although the main principles of the attack and defence remain
-unchanged and the primary armament of both is still the heavy
-artillery, the improvement of small-arms, their great range, and
-rapid fire have materially altered the nature of the fighting in
-the later stages and during the assault. The result of this has
-been to prolong the defence after the fortress has been dismantled
-by the bombardment, and to render the storming of a single breach
-an operation no longer possible in war. The machine gun is largely
-responsible for this; and when high-explosive shells have destroyed
-the fortifications and disabled the artillery, the stormers will
-be met by rifle fire and that of machine guns concealed among
-the ruins of the works. The intensity and accuracy of this fire
-will be such as to result frequently in the complete repulse of
-the assault, and even when the glacis of a work has been occupied
-it may be several weeks before the capture of the work itself is
-effected.
-
-Machine guns are particularly suited to the defence of
-fortresses during this period, and Sir G. S. Clarke, in his book
-_Fortification_, says: “The fire of the Maxim gun, delivering about
-700 bullets a minute,[38] can be directed by one man, who need not
-show more than his head (easily shielded) above the parapet, the
-feed being tended by another man completely under cover. In the
-special qualities of the machine gun there is a distinct advantage
-to the defence, arising from the fact that _an intense fire over a
-particular area can be suddenly developed by a few men occupying
-a small space_. This, in the case of night attacks especially,
-is a valuable quality. At Port Arthur the Russians in some cases
-employed machine guns with good effect, concealing them so that
-their fire came as a surprise to the assaulting parties. Their
-portability renders them well suited for the defence of positions,
-and they will doubtless form an important element in the armament
-of fortresses.”
-
-Speaking of the difficulty of “storming” the modern fortress, the
-same author says: “The _vive force_ school proposed therefore--on
-paper--to shell them heavily and then storm, trusting to incomplete
-organisation and general unpreparedness. There is little or nothing
-in military history to bear out the views of this school, and
-modern experience is entirely against them. Only one such attempt
-was made in 1870-1, against the indifferent provisional works of
-Belfort, garrisoned mainly by _Gardes Mobiles_--and this failed
-completely. The tremendous assaults on the defences of Port Arthur
-may have been partially inspired by the German teaching; but the
-results were discouraging, although the devoted and sustained
-gallantry of the Japanese could not be surpassed and probably would
-not be equalled by any European army.”
-
-The machine guns of a fortress should be divided into two
-classes--the stationary and the mobile guns. To the former will be
-allotted the defence of distinct portions of the permanent works,
-and they will be provided with cone and parapet mountings,[39] the
-former being fixed and the latter capable of being moved within the
-work to which it is allotted.
-
-The mobile guns should be mounted on a light tripod and carried
-in a low-wheeled handcart, or they may be mounted on a very light
-two-wheeled carriage capable of being drawn by one man and having
-wheels of small track, which can move over the narrowest roads
-in the fortress. These mobile guns should not be allotted to any
-particular work, but to the garrison other than those within the
-forts, for use in repelling assaults and making counter-attacks.
-
-We will deal first with the stationary machine guns. It will not be
-necessary to provide a machine gun for each cone mounting, as the
-guns can be easily carried from one cone to another as required.
-Shields should be used with all stationary mountings, but must be
-detachable, and should not be placed in position until required, as
-they indicate the situation of the gun and are easily destroyed by
-artillery.
-
-The positions for machine-gun mountings in a fort must depend on
-the size and construction of the work, the nature of the outer
-defences, and particularly on the supporting works in the immediate
-vicinity. Positions commanding the glacis and the entanglements,
-on salients of works and enfilading ditches, and any dead ground
-where the enemy may effect a lodgment, are suitable. Counterscarp
-galleries at the angles of works flanking the ditch should
-invariably have machine-gun positions, with a special loophole,
-long and shallow, to enable them to sweep a wide area with fire.
-
-The selection of the positions for machine guns in permanent works
-belongs to the art of the engineer, and there is little that can be
-said of their tactical employment. Fire should be reserved until
-the attack has reached close range, and then only opened when the
-target is large and vulnerable. Guns must be concealed by every
-possible device and all the loopholes must be blinded. By night
-all guns should be mounted and trained to sweep ground by which
-the enemy must approach; when search-lights are not in use, the
-elevation should be checked by the use of a clinometer and the
-amount of traverse may be shown by chalk lines on the parapet, or
-white stones placed in two rows. In this way accurate fire may be
-brought to bear on the assault on the darkest night, and many night
-attacks were repulsed with machine-gun fire by the Russians at Port
-Arthur. Sir G. S. Clarke says: “The front faces of the forts were
-retrenched in some cases by obstacles and a line of field parapet
-across the terre-plein. _These, with the assistance of machine guns
-brought up at the last moment_, enabled assaults of the breaches
-formed by the mines to be repulsed.” Again, “The Russians used
-machine guns with effect, frequently concealing them in light
-blindages, so that their positions could not be detected until they
-were brought to bear upon an attacking force.”
-
-The war correspondent Mr. F. Villiers, in his book _Three Months
-with the Besiegers_, speaking of the storming of West Panlung
-Redoubt,[40] says: “The death-dealing machine guns of the Russians
-_in the casemates of the fort_ are playing ghastly havoc--such
-havoc that only a score or more of Ouchi’s battalions reached the
-first ditch of the fence, where they threw themselves panting into
-the grateful cover of the pits their own artillery have torn.”
-
-The number of machine guns allotted to the permanent works of Port
-Arthur is given as 38 by the United States Official Report, while
-Nojine, in _The Truth about Port Arthur_, gives them in detail as
-28, the distribution of which is shown in red figures on the map at
-the end of Chapter IX. The ten guns unaccounted for were probably
-mobile, and used for the defence of the harbour and the various
-landing-places in the neighbourhood of the fortress.
-
-The mobile machine guns of the fortress will be used on the
-advanced line of defence with the mobile troops, and should be
-divided into two--those allotted to the outposts and those allotted
-to the local reserve.[41] Those allotted to the outposts must be
-placed in carefully selected positions commanding the approaches
-to the section of the defence to which they have been posted.
-These positions will usually be in minor works such as redoubts,
-emplacements, and lunettes, and they will be selected for their
-good field of fire, particular attention being paid to their
-command of dead ground in front of other works. Great care and
-trouble must be taken in concealing the guns and providing them
-with good cover, not only from rifle fire, but also from artillery.
-An endeavour should be made to command all wire entanglements along
-the front with machine guns, and the angles of traverse of each gun
-should be carefully laid off and marked in white paint or tape, so
-that they may be used in the dark accurately to sweep their area
-of ground. Too much stress cannot be laid on the importance of the
-accurate laying and sighting of machine guns by day for use at
-night, and it must be remembered that they are the only weapons
-which are capable of bringing a rapid and concentrated rifle fire
-on a particular spot in the dark, and are therefore invaluable to
-the defence during a night attack.
-
-The detachments of guns on outpost duty at night should be told
-off into three watches of two men each, whose duty it will be to
-remain with the gun in readiness for instant action. The gun should
-be loaded and laid, and the men on duty should watch the front.
-Where the gun is in an emplacement or other loop-holed work, one
-man should watch through the loophole in turns of half an hour
-at a time. The strain of peering into the dark and listening for
-the sound of an approach at night is so great that no man should
-be required to do this duty for more than half an hour at a time,
-while the chance of a man dozing during a short spell is much
-reduced and the acuteness of the senses has not time to get dulled.
-Very strict orders must be given to insure that fire is not opened
-prematurely; and where infantry sentries are on duty near the gun,
-it may be advisable not to load the gun, but merely to insert the
-belt in the feed-block in readiness.
-
-It is always advisable to have the gun ready for any emergency
-at night, and the following will be found an effective method of
-preparing the sights for aiming in the dark. Cut a piece of white
-paper, previously prepared with luminous paint, into the shape
-of a triangle, and paste it on the slide of the tangent sight so
-that the apex of the triangle touches the bottom of the V of the
-sight. Cut also a circular piece of a size that will fit on the
-foresight just below the tip, and paste this on the foresight. On
-looking over the sights in the dark, when the luminous ball on the
-foresight is seen resting on the apex of the luminous triangle on
-the tangent sight, the gun will be truly laid for the range for
-which the sight is set.
-
-Machine guns with the local reserves must be light and mobile; they
-will be used in a similar way to those with infantry, and to assist
-in counter-attacks, particularly against the advanced infantry
-positions and sap-heads of the besiegers. They may also have
-opportunities of enfilading a trench or firing into a work that has
-been captured by the enemy. When used for this purpose they must be
-brought up by hand under cover and open fire at close range from
-a position that commands the interior of the trench or work, and
-if possible enfilades it. Great risks are justified in bringing up
-machine guns for this purpose, as the results of a successful fire
-action will usually be decisive and far-reaching.
-
-The following is an example of their use in this manner during the
-siege of Port Arthur:
-
-“On the attack on 203-Metre Hill, machine guns on Akasakayama
-flanked the position and enfiladed the attackers. Four hundred
-Japanese were sheltered together in a parallel, where they
-were completely screened from fire from any part of 203-Metre
-Hill. Suddenly two machine guns, _which had been concealed on
-Akasakayama, where they could fire directly into the parallel_,
-opened fire. Within a few seconds it was turned into a veritable
-pandemonium, a seething mass of humanity, where men were wildly
-fighting to get away, trampling on the wounded, climbing over
-piles of corpses which blocked the entrance, and trying to escape
-down the coverless hillside. But the Maxims did their work as
-only Maxims can, and within a few moments practically the whole
-force was wiped out; a few men were shot dead as they ran down
-the hillside, but nearly all the others were killed in the narrow
-trench. It took the Japanese days to extricate and carry away the
-fearfully intermingled corpses.”[42]
-
-There are so many instances of the successful use of machine guns
-in the defence of Port Arthur that it will be impossible to quote
-more than a few of the most striking to illustrate the principle on
-which they should be employed.
-
-At the third general attack on November 26th, at 2 p.m., a large
-force of Japanese assaulted Sung-shu fort, and having crossed the
-moat through a bomb-proof passage, they gained the parapet of the
-rampart and swarmed over it. “Into this seething mass of humanity
-the machine guns of the forts and batteries on An-tzu Shan poured
-such a tremendous fire that the attackers were mowed down, crushed,
-dispersed, and sent head over heels to the moat again in less than
-half a minute, before a single man had reached the interior of the
-fort. _The same fate befell a fresh attempt undertaken at five
-o’clock._”[43]
-
-Here we see the importance of machine guns being able to command
-the parapet of neighbouring works, and the necessity of reserving
-fire until the best possible target is presented, even though the
-enemy is permitted actually to scale the parapet. The same thing
-occurred at the storming of Erh-lung Fort. At midnight on November
-26th the Japanese “made a desperate attempt to storm the upper
-battery, but the assailants were mown down by machine guns, _as
-soon as they appeared on the parapet_.”[44]
-
-This is a good illustration of the use of machine guns at night,
-and no doubt these guns had been trained by day to sweep the
-parapet in anticipation of an attack after dark. “On January 28th,
-1905, near Linchinpan at about 7 p.m. the Japanese attacked the
-forts of Vosnesenski and the trenches near by in which were posted
-two machine guns. These latter opened fire at 200 or 300 yards on a
-Japanese company in line. _In one or two minutes they fired about
-1,000 rounds and the Japanese company was annihilated._”[45] During
-the attack on North Chi-kuan Fort on December 19th, by the 38th
-Regiment under General Samayeda, which took place at 5 p.m., the
-men were sent over the parapet man by man from different points, to
-make it more difficult for the Russian machine gunners. “As soon as
-there was a little interval in the rattling of the machine guns, a
-man would jump up and run for his life, and seek shelter behind the
-débris piled up in the terre-plein after the explosion, or in the
-holes which the big howitzer shells had made in the ground. Though
-many of the men were shot down in the short race, little by little
-a force of about 150 men were assembled in the front part of the
-fort, and the commander, Captain Iwamoto, then led them against
-the sandbag trenches at the rear.... The fighting was mostly
-hand-to-hand, _but the Russian machine guns took an important part
-in the defence_, their galling fire making fearful ravages amongst
-the attacking party. The Japanese, therefore, got a couple of
-mountain guns hauled up on the parapet, and with them succeeded in
-silencing the Maxims.”[46]
-
-Speaking of the use of machine guns in the defence of Port Arthur,
-Norregaard says: “As an active means of defence the search-light
-and _machine guns_ undoubtedly come in the first rank. The Japanese
-acknowledge the immense value of machine guns to the defence. The
-search-lights are stationary, they say, and the ground round Port
-Arthur is broken, so that they can avoid them; but the machine guns
-can be moved about anywhere and can easily be shifted from place to
-place by a couple of men. It is nearly impossible to detect them
-and put them out of action; their effect on the Japanese was most
-disastrous and time after time enabled the Russians to beat off
-their attacks, inflicting severe losses. Nothing can stand against
-them, and it is no wonder that the Japanese fear them and even the
-bravest have a chilly feeling creeping down their backs when the
-enemy’s machine guns beat their devil’s tattoo. They shoot with
-amazing precision even at very long range, and they were splendidly
-served.”
-
-The U.S.A. Official Report on the siege of Port Arthur states:
-“Machine guns played an important part in the siege, being freely
-used by both sides.... The guns were used with telling effect
-against the Japanese in the numerous bloody assaults, _being
-trained to cover all the approaches with murderous fire_.” These
-last words condense into a single sentence their tactics in the
-defence of a fortress.
-
-The Russians used the Maxim of ·312 calibre manufactured by
-Vickers, Sons & Maxim, of London, while the Japanese used the
-Hotchkiss of ·253 calibre made at the Arsenal at Tokyo. The
-Japanese had 72 of these weapons at Port Arthur, immediately under
-the command of the Divisional General, viz. 24 guns with each
-Division.
-
-The use of machine guns in the siege of a fortress will cover a
-far wider field than in the defence, and much that has already
-been written of their employment both in the attack and defence,
-of positions will apply to the attack on a fortress. It cannot be
-claimed for machine guns that they are as vital to the success of
-the besiegers as they are to the garrison, but that they often
-afford material assistance during assaults, in holding sap-heads
-and repelling sorties, cannot be denied.
-
-The details of their tactical employment with the besiegers will
-differ greatly in accordance with the nature of the operations, and
-particularly with the situation of the fortress and the surrounding
-country. In the case of Port Arthur the broken and mountainous
-nature of the terrain, the deep ravines, and rocky watercourses all
-lent themselves to the employment of machine guns, and consequently
-the Japanese were able to make greater use of them than would have
-been the case under less favourable conditions.
-
-It will be impossible here to do more than briefly indicate how
-machine guns may be used to assist in siege operations generally,
-and then show how the Japanese used them before Port Arthur.
-
-“When the enemy’s advanced troops have been driven in and the
-preliminary reconnaissance has enabled the line of investment to be
-fixed, this line will be divided into sections, to which commanders
-will be appointed and troops allotted.... Outposts will be
-established as closely as possible round the fortress in order to
-cut it off from outside communication and to protect the operations
-in rear.[47] Machine guns should be allotted to these sections
-in proportion to their importance in the line of investment.
-The commander of the section should use them according to the
-circumstances of the situation, but as a rule a large proportion of
-the guns should be distributed to the outposts.... The duties of
-outposts in siege operations are even more important and exacting
-than they are in the field operations; in the case both of an
-investment and of a regular siege the brunt of the work throughout
-will fall upon the outposts.... They must therefore have greater
-power of resistance than outposts in field warfare in order to
-prevent the troops in rear from being disturbed by every skirmish.
-The outposts of a section which is maintaining a close investment
-should be about one quarter of the total infantry allotted to the
-section, together with a proportion of artillery, _machine guns,
-and engineers_.”[48]
-
-The positions for the machine guns should be along the _line of
-resistance_, which will usually be the piquet line. It will be
-necessary to provide bomb-proof emplacements for the machine guns,
-and alternative emplacements should be made for each gun. The
-temptation to engage in the fire fight must be resisted, and the
-machine guns should be solely employed for resisting attacks and
-their fire reserved till close range. Once they have been unmasked,
-it will be advisable to move them to a fresh position, leaving a
-dummy gun in the old position.
-
-In the second phase of the siege the machine guns not required
-for the outpost line should be allotted to the local reserves
-and the general reserve, and will be used as circumstances
-require in assisting attacks on outlying works and in repelling
-counter-attacks. In the third phase machine guns must be pushed
-up to secure sap-heads and to assist the infantry in the
-assault; they will be found specially useful in covering the
-advance of assaulting infantry by sweeping parapets with fire
-and in securing captured works against counter-attacks. Sandbags
-should always be carried with machine guns supporting infantry
-in the assault, and the first consideration should be to secure
-the guns from fire on reaching a position. It must be remembered
-that machine guns in siege operations are always exposed to their
-worst enemy--artillery--and that their only hope of success is
-by concealment and cover. An example of their use in repulsing a
-counter-attack at Port Arthur is given by Nojine in his book _The
-Truth about Port Arthur_. Speaking of the attempt by the Russians
-to retake Chien-shan, he says: “The 13th Regiment took two-thirds
-of it, but could not advance further, as the Japanese threw in
-heavy reinforcements _and brought up a number of machine guns_.
-On the night of the 5th we had to withdraw and abandon further
-attempts to retake the position, as one attack alone had cost us
-500 men.”
-
-The following account from the U.S.A. Official Report of the
-storming of Fort Erh-lung, one of the principal forts of Port
-Arthur, shows how machine guns can be used to assist in the final
-assault. “On December 28th the parapet of Fort Erh-lung was blown
-up at 10 a.m. by five mines being simultaneously sprung.... When
-the smoke cleared sufficiently, the exterior slope at the salient
-of the fort was seen to be filled with a dense crowd of Japanese
-infantry, who closely hugged the ground.... It appears that the
-Russians had occupied the heavy gun line which lies in the interior
-of the fort _and with machine guns_ raked the front parapet and
-thus made it impossible for the Japanese infantry to leave their
-cover on the exterior slope. Meanwhile the Japanese brought up
-_three machine guns, and with these replied to the Russian fire
-from the heavy line_.... The bombardment kept up without diminution
-until about 1 p.m., when it slackened perceptibly on both sides....
-About 4 p.m. the Japanese infantry could be seen working along the
-flanks of the work on the outside of the parapet. The Russians
-retired to the gorge parapet which had been arranged to fire to
-the front, and maintained themselves for several hours longer. By
-7.30 p.m. the Japanese had fully mastered the position, and the
-largest and strongest of the permanent works on the front of attack
-fell into their possession.... A large number of field and machine
-guns[49] were included in the spoils of Fort Erh-lung. The assault
-entailed a loss of about 1,000 men to the Japanese.”
-
-During the attack on Wangtai Fort the Japanese used machine guns
-from the high ridge N.E. of the fort, and thus brought a heavy fire
-against the Russian interior line.
-
-The Japanese invariably brought up their machine guns with the
-assault and lost no time in placing them in position to hold
-captured works. This is indeed their true rôle in the assault, as
-they will seldom be able to support the actual stormers with fire,
-but once a foothold is gained in a work, they may be invaluable for
-the purpose of holding it and thus set free the storming party for
-another advance.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER VIII
-
-EMPLOYMENT IN THE FIELD IN MINOR OPERATIONS
-
-
-SMALL WARS
-
-Callwell, in his well-known work on this subject, defines the
-small war in the following terms: “It comprises the expeditions
-against savages and semi-civilised races by disciplined soldiers,
-it comprises campaigns undertaken to suppress rebellions and
-guerilla warfare in all parts of the world where organised armies
-are struggling against opponents who will not meet them in the open
-field, and it thus obviously covers operations very varying in
-their scope and in their conditions.”[50]
-
-The British Empire, “upon which the sun never sets,” is seldom
-without its small war in some remote part of the globe, and it is
-safe to affirm that there is never a small war in which the machine
-gun does not play a prominent part.
-
-Wars against savages or semi-civilised peoples differ fundamentally
-in principles and tactics from war against a civilised enemy,
-and the tactics adopted will be governed by the object of the
-expedition and the tactics and arms of the enemy to be dealt with.
-Callwell says: “The tactics of such opponents differ so greatly in
-various cases that it is essential that these be taken fully into
-consideration. The armament of the enemy is also a point of extreme
-importance.”
-
-In dealing with machine-gun tactics in small wars, it is obviously
-impossible to treat with all the situations that may be met with or
-to attempt to lay down definite rules for their use under all the
-varying conditions of country, race, and arms before mentioned. It
-will therefore be sufficient for our purpose to show how machine
-guns may be used generally in warfare in uncivilised countries,
-and then to take a single typical campaign to illustrate their
-employment.
-
-“Against an enemy who fights outside stockades, machine guns are
-very efficacious; and in any case against all uncivilised people a
-sudden burst of fire from these is often most paralysing.”[51]
-
-After speaking of the jamming of non-automatic machine guns at
-Ulundi, Abu Klea, Dogali, and Tofreck, Callwell says: “On the
-other hand, Maxims, which can be easily handled and moved, have
-done excellent service in East Africa, in Matabililand, and in
-the campaigns on the North-West Frontier of India. There can be
-no doubt that machine guns of an easily portable and thoroughly
-trustworthy class may be most valuable in small wars, and they
-will probably be freely used in such operations in the future,
-especially when the enemy is inclined to attack in mass. In hill
-warfare these weapons scarcely get a proper chance, as they are not
-very well suited for picking off individuals and as it is dangerous
-to thrust them too far to the front with the small parties which
-are so much used in operations of this class. In bush warfare
-also the want of a fair target is unfavourable to them, and when
-the shooting is at short range the detachment is likely to be put
-_hors de combat_, as it offers such a good target; this happened
-at Owikokaro. An open field of fire and a well-defined object to
-aim at are almost more necessary to machine guns than to artillery.
-On the defensive, machine guns can hardly fail to be valuable. In
-laager, zarebas, and detached posts of all kinds they are always
-likely to be of service, and to a certain extent they may take the
-place of guns for such work. During the operations in Rhodesia
-in 1896 they were found very useful as a protection to the small
-laagers left behind by the columns when they moved out for a fight.
-Two of them did tremendous execution in Chakdara Fort during the
-siege of that post in 1897. It is interesting to note that at the
-fight on the Shangani River in Matabililand after the attempt to
-capture the king had failed, the troops, although they were in a
-bad position, could not move to a better one for a while, simply
-because the machine guns would have been thrown out of action
-during the change of position. Against rushes of Zulus, Ghazis,
-or other fanatics the effect of such weapons is tremendous, as
-long as the fire is well maintained. In the excitement of the
-moment the best infantry may fire unsteadily; but machine guns can
-be absolutely trusted to commit destructive havoc in the hostile
-throng, provided that their mechanism does not go out of order.”[52]
-
-The above is interesting as showing the wide field for their use in
-small arms and yet how narrow the method of tactical employment.
-It may be summed up in a few words: a good target, a good field of
-fire, constant readiness for action, and sufficient protection to
-enable the gun to be handled with confidence.
-
-Machine guns should form an integral part of the arm to which they
-are attached, and must be used with them to supplement their fire
-power. In attack they must seek positions from which to bring to
-bear a concentrated and overwhelming fire on the main body of the
-enemy, and against savages this must be from the flanks or rear
-to be successful, as the object is to prevent flight and insure
-decisive results. Their real value in small wars lies in their
-enormous defensive powers, which may be employed in clearing
-the way for columns in enclosed country, in stopping a charge
-of fanatics whether mounted or on foot, and in preventing small
-columns on the march from being overwhelmed by superior numbers.
-
-It will be found that, although it is the invariable rule for the
-disciplined force in a small war to assume the initiative and
-attack with vigour on every possible occasion, the uncivilised
-enemy, by reason of his primitive arms and tactics, generally
-avoids the encounter until he is able to make an attack at a time
-and on ground of his own choosing. Thus we find the disciplined
-force thrown on the defensive in the early stages of the expedition
-and the very heavy losses inflicted then often directly lead to a
-speedy termination of the campaign. Callwell says: “The tactics
-adopted by the Zulus and Mahdists when flushed with confidence
-were best met at a halt in close formation, even on ground where
-arms of precision could not tell with full effect. In the jungles
-of Dahomey the sudden hostile attacks on flanks and rear could be
-confronted most satisfactorily by the troops on the spot acting
-on the defence until the edge was taken off the hostile appetite
-for combat.... Where a small force of regular troops is opposed to
-great hostile masses, no matter how ill-armed or how deficient in
-morale the masses may be, circumstances render it almost imperative
-to act on the defensive.”
-
-For this reason alone machine guns form the most valuable arm in
-encounters of this nature, and their tremendous effect cannot be
-better illustrated than at Omdurman, where they literally mowed
-down the attacking masses in great swathes.
-
-The first consideration when employing machine guns in a small war
-is the method of carrying the gun and its ammunition, which must
-be suited to the country in which the operations are to take place.
-
-In the majority of cases it will be found that the usual transport
-of the country is the most suitable, and a tripod-mounted gun can
-be adapted to almost any form of carriage. In mountainous open
-country such as the North-West Frontier of India mules or ponies
-are suitable; in the desert the camel has been used; while in the
-forests of East Africa machine guns have been carried by porters on
-their heads, strapped on their backs, or slung beneath a pole by
-two men. Whatever method is adopted, it is essential that the gun
-can be brought into action easily and quickly, and that it is at
-least as mobile as the troops it accompanies.
-
-The operations in Somaliland in 1901-4 are an excellent example of
-one of our typical small wars, and will serve to illustrate the use
-of machine guns against a savage enemy in a bush country.
-
-The camel is the transport animal of the country and riding camels
-were used to carry the machine guns with the infantry of the force.
-In the first expedition, under Lieut.-Colonel Swayne, there were
-three Maxim guns--two of which were ·450 bore and one a ·303. On
-June 2nd, 1901, Captain McNeil, who was left in zareba at Smala
-to guard the live stock, was attacked by about 3,000 Somalis, who
-increased to about 5,000 on the 3rd. His force consisted of three
-British officers and 500 native troops, many of whom were native
-levies and only 370 of whom were armed with rifles. There were
-about 3,500 camels, 100 horses, and some cattle and goats in a
-separate zareba from the men who were above and able to command it.
-The Maxim, under Lieutenant Younghusband and served by Somalis,
-was placed on a cairn of stones at the top of the men’s zareba and
-commanded a good field of fire all round. The ground was fairly
-open all round, and clear of bushes for about 150 yards from the
-zareba. Before the camels could be driven in, the enemy’s horsemen
-appeared and threatened to capture a large head of camels, to
-prevent which a section under a Jemada was sent out to try to
-keep off the enemy until these camels could be driven in. Captain
-McNeil says: “I supported him by turning the Maxim on the nearest
-horseman.... Some of the horsemen had got round by now a good way
-out, but by keeping the Maxim on them, supported by long-range
-volleys from the Punjabis, we did much to check them.”[53]
-
-On June 3rd at about 9 a.m. a very large force of footmen attacked
-in one long line several ranks deep and enveloped the south and
-west sides of both zarebas. They came on at a steady pace and
-opened fire at about 400 yards. Fire was reserved until the enemy
-were at about 500 yards range, when heavy fire was opened by both
-rifles and Maxim, with the result that no one got within 150 yards
-of the zareba, though they advanced most pluckily. 180 dead were
-found around the zareba, and the enemy’s loss was estimated at 500.
-
-The danger of rushing machine guns up to the front while still
-mounted is shown in an incident that occurred on June 17th during
-a successful attack on the Mullah’s villages near Feriddin. During
-the reconnaissance the mounted corps became somewhat heavily
-engaged, and Colonel Swayne sent forward the reserve company and
-the Maxims to bring fire to bear from a commanding spur about two
-miles to the front. On reaching the spur they came under a heavy
-fire, and the Maxim camels and some ponies were shot down. The
-Somalis, however, were able to disentangle the Maxims from the dead
-camels and bring them into action on commanding ground.[54] Colonel
-Swayne, in his official report, said: “Mekometers were badly wanted
-for the Maxims.... The Maxims had a trick of jamming at critical
-moments, but were quickly set right again. The fault may have been
-due to the belts.”
-
-When the Maxim gun jams without a breakage of the mechanism, the
-fault is usually want of experience on the part of the gunner.
-
-During the third expedition the machine guns were increased to
-eleven and were carried by porters with the infantry.
-
-The disaster to Colonel Plunkett’s force at Gumburu on April 17th
-was due to ammunition running short. The force, consisting of about
-200 men with two machine guns, was attacked by a large force of
-horse and foot. They at once formed square, and took up a position
-in an open spot surrounded by dense bush at from 300 to 600 yards’
-distance. For some two hours they were able to hold off the enemy,
-but on the ammunition being exhausted they were overwhelmed.
-
-On April 22nd, 1903, Major Gough’s force of about 200 men with one
-machine gun was attacked in thick bush by a large force under very
-similar conditions to Colonel Plunkett. The attack began at 10.30
-a.m. from all sides, and was continued with great determination
-until 2 p.m. Square was formed, and fire opened at very close
-range (20 to 50 yards), owing to the dense bush. “The Maxim, under
-Sergeant Gibb, was moved from place to place as occasion arose, the
-enemy always giving way when it opened fire.”[55]
-
-In the fourth expedition, under General Egerton, the ammunition per
-machine gun was 30,200 rounds in garrison, 10,400 rounds with the
-brigade, and 2,200 rounds in second-line transport; 6,000 rounds
-with each gun was carried ready in belts.
-
-During the action at Jidbali on January 10th, 1904, the force
-engaged, which consisted of about 2,500, including native levies,
-the infantry, about 1,299 strong, formed the usual hollow square
-round the transport. The enemy consisted of the pick of the
-Mullah’s fighting Dervishes, and were about 6,000 to 8,000 strong.
-The Dervishes advanced in regular skirmishing order, rushing from
-cover to cover, and lying down. A few got within 400 yards of the
-square, _but were unable to face the heavy rifle and Maxim fire
-that met them_, and this attack failed. Then two determined rushes
-were made on the front and right flank of the square, _but they
-were met with such a terrific fire from rifles and Maxims that the
-charging enemy could not face it_. At 10 a.m. the whole mass of
-the enemy broke and fled, followed by fire till it was masked by
-the pursuing mounted troops. Six hundred and sixty-eight dead were
-counted round the position two days later.[56]
-
-“_Much execution was done by the Maxim worked in the right corner
-of the square by Sergeant Gibbs, 1st Bn. King’s African Rifles, on
-the groups of Dervishes taking cover behind the scattered clumps
-of bushes surrounding the square. One entire group of nine men was
-wiped out in a moment by this Maxim._”[57]
-
-It will be seen that machine guns are a very useful auxiliary in
-bush warfare, especially in holding posts and defending squares
-from the rush of fanatics. They must always march with the main
-body of the arm to which they are attached, and be used as
-circumstances require. A high state of efficiency in working the
-gun, a thorough knowledge of its mechanism, and ability to bring
-it into action with great rapidity are of more importance in bush
-warfare than tactical handling, which is usually of the simplest
-description.
-
-
-MOUNTAIN WARFARE
-
-“The principle of always having bodies of men in rear or on the
-flanks, covering by their fire the advance or retirement of the
-troops nearest the enemy, is specially important in hill fighting.
-On nearly every ridge and spur positions will be found where this
-can be done, and advantage can also often be taken of parallel
-features, from which covering and cross fire may be used with
-effect.”[58]
-
-It will seldom be possible to make much use of machine guns with
-the advanced guards, as mountaineers usually oppose the advance
-by bands of skirmishers who fire from the cover of rocks and
-scattered sangars, and while affording a bad target to the machine
-gun, can quickly put it out of action by concentrating their fire
-upon it. They are also unsuitable for piqueting the heights, on
-account of the difficulty of getting them into position and of
-rapidly withdrawing them again. They are, however, very useful to
-strengthen small fortified posts on the lines of communications,
-and for the defence of camps by night, being trained by day and the
-sights prepared as suggested in Chapter VII., page 150. Callwell
-says: “It is a good plan, if night attacks are at all probable,
-to train guns and machine guns by daylight upon points where the
-enemy may be expected to mass, or from which assault is to be
-anticipated. _This was done at the defence of Chakdara in 1897 with
-excellent results._”
-
-Machine guns are invaluable to the rear guard of a force retiring,
-which is an exceedingly difficult undertaking in mountain warfare,
-because hillmen invariably await this opportunity to swoop down
-and make a vigorous attack. The very nature of the operations
-necessitates frequent retirements. Callwell says: “Columns have
-to visit outlying valleys for punitive purposes, and must then
-rejoin the main body; and even when penetrating into the heart of
-a hostile mountain district, the rear of the army, as it passes
-successively the homes of different tribes and clans, draws these
-down upon it, and, as a result of the general direction of its
-march, retires before them.”
-
-_Field Service Regulations_, 1909, speaking of rear guards in
-mountain warfare, says: “Mountain artillery should usually form
-part of a rear guard, _and machine guns may be usefully employed_.
-The withdrawal of the artillery is usually an encouragement to the
-enemy to press on, and on such occasions machine guns will often
-find scope for action....” “If the rear-guard commander considers
-it impossible to reach camp before nightfall, it will generally be
-advisable for him to halt and bivouac for the night in the most
-favourable position for defence.” Here, again, machine guns will
-be most useful in defending the bivouac after dark if trained by
-daylight to sweep approaches, while the morale effect of its
-accurate fire in the dark will be considerable. There are many
-instances from our wars on the North-West Frontier where machine
-guns might have been used profitably in covering the retreat; but
-to be successfully employed in such cases, they must be far more
-mobile and better trained for rapid-fire practice than they have
-been in the past. Lieut.-Colonel Haughton’s retreat from the Iseri
-Kandeo Pass is typical of such operations. “A brigade had been sent
-on detached duty into the Warais Valley, and after completing its
-work there was rejoining the rest of the army in Maidan. In doing
-so the brigade had to cross the Iseri Kandeo Pass over the hills
-which separate the two valleys. As the force quitted its bivouacs
-the Ghurkas were left as rear guard, while the 15th Sikhs were told
-off to hold the Kotal, which was about half-way. The main body and
-baggage moved off early, and the latter reached the maidan almost
-unnoticed. The Ghurkas, however, were pressed from the commencement
-of the retirement right up to the top of the Kotal; then they
-marched on, leaving the 15th Sikhs to cover the retirement. As the
-Sikhs began to draw in their piquets from the heights above the
-pass, the Afridis, as was their wont, grew bolder and bolder, and,
-taking advantage of the cover of a wood hard by, they crept down
-close to the rear guard. One company as it withdrew was suddenly
-charged by a crowd of swordsmen.... But those who participated in
-this rush paid dearly for their temerity, the Sikh company meeting
-them with steady musketry and being most opportunely reinforced
-by another company. The carrying off of the wounded was, however,
-becoming a matter of serious difficulty, so reinforcements were
-asked for. These arrived in the shape of two companies of Dorsets
-and of several companies of the 36th Sikhs under Lieut.-Colonel
-Haughton, who assumed command, and who withdrew his force down the
-hill without much loss.”[59] It is easy to imagine how machine
-guns might have been used here, and how their presence might even
-have rendered the reinforcements unnecessary; but unless they are
-capable of coming into action and opening fire in thirty seconds,
-and of packing up and moving off again after ceasing fire in the
-same time, the rear guard in mountain warfare is no place for them
-and they had best march with the baggage.
-
-During the expedition to Tibet some trouble arose with the machine
-guns owing to the extreme cold, which not only froze the water in
-the barrel-casing of the Maxims, but froze the lubricating oil in
-the lock and recoiling parts and thus rendered the gun useless.
-When very low temperatures are encountered in high latitudes,
-alcohol or spirit should be added to the water to prevent it
-freezing; and as potable spirit is liable to “evaporate,” a little
-paraffin oil should be added. Glycerine may be substituted for
-lubricating oil in temperatures where even Russian petroleum will
-freeze.
-
-
-CONVOYS
-
-Callwell defines a convoy as “a column of non-combatants guarded by
-a comparatively speaking small escort.” The object of this escort
-is to hold off all hostile parties and to get the convoy to its
-destination in safety. Escorts will generally have to be reduced
-to the smallest possible size in order not to deprive the fighting
-force of men. They will therefore always act on the defensive,
-while endeavouring to keep moving with the convoy, which will only
-be halted when compelled to do so for its own safety. When the
-escort consists of the three arms, machine guns may be used to
-reduce the number of infantry required very considerably, while
-adding to the defensive power of those necessary.
-
-In minor operations where every available rifle is required with
-the fighting force, machine guns will be found invaluable to
-replace infantry. Their exact position with the convoy must depend
-upon its composition and length and the number of guns available.
-The principle of having a machine gun, or where possible a section,
-at the head and another at the rear end of the line of wagons or
-pack animals is sound, as these are the vital points, and an attack
-on the centre can be met by a cross fire from these positions. If
-the convoy is unduly long, another gun or section may be placed in
-the centre. Should it be necessary to form laager, the machine guns
-in the front and rear enable this to be done under their converging
-fire. Where wagons or carts are used and the enemy is unprovided
-with arms of precision, machine guns may be mounted on the tops
-of wagons, so that they can open fire instantly and fire while
-moving forward with the convoy; this position not only provides
-them with a good field of fire, but also affords protection to the
-detachments from a sudden charge home of savages from an ambush.
-
-“The success of an attack upon a convoy usually depends upon the
-defeat of the protecting troops. This will involve a combat, which
-will be governed by the principles already laid down in this
-manual.... If fighting is inevitable, the enemy should be engaged
-as far from the convoy as possible.”[60]
-
-For this reason machine guns should open fire on any body of the
-enemy presenting a good target, even at long range, if they are
-moving to attack the convoy. The presence of machine guns with a
-convoy will free the infantry to move out wide on the flanks in
-open country, and to push ahead to piquet hills, clear bush, and
-occupy heights on the line of march, without exposing the convoy to
-danger during their absence.
-
-
-BLOCKHOUSES
-
-Blockhouses have been much used in warfare in uncivilised
-countries ever since the introduction of firearms, to enable small
-detachments on a frontier or on the lines of communication to
-maintain themselves in the midst of the enemy when unsupported by
-other troops, and also to form a chain of posts across an enemy’s
-country for the capture or suppression of guerilla bands.
-
-Looking back to the South African War, it appears inexplicable
-that little or no use was made of machine guns to hold the long
-blockhouse lines which stretched for so many hundreds of miles in
-every direction during the latter stages of the war. Time after
-time the Boers succeeded in breaking through this line, even in
-places where the blockhouses were within effective range of each
-other and the intervening space guarded by elaborate barbed-wire
-entanglements. The reason for this is not difficult to discover.
-Screened by the darkness, the fire of the small garrisons of these
-blockhouses was neither sufficiently powerful nor accurate to
-stop the majority of the enemy from breaking through, even though
-stopped by the entanglements and compelled to use a single gap. The
-annihilating and concentrated fire of machine guns which had been
-laid by day to sweep the entanglements should render the forcing of
-a similar blockhouse line impossible in the future. Machine guns in
-detached blockhouses should be sited as low as is compatible with a
-good field of fire, and should have long narrow loopholes prepared
-for them for at least two positions on every face. Constant change
-of position within the blockhouse after firing will prevent the
-enemy from being able to “snipe” the gunners through the loopholes.
-
-The great variety of conditions and circumstances under which minor
-operations take place renders it impossible to do more than show
-how they may be used in certain selected instances. The machine
-gunner must be prepared to modify and adapt his tactics to suit the
-special circumstances of the expedition with which he is employed,
-and he cannot do better than study Callwell’s _Small Wars, their
-Principles and Practice_, which has been so freely quoted in this
-chapter.
-
-
-ENCLOSED COUNTRY
-
-This chapter would not be complete without some reference to the
-use of machine guns in enclosed country such as is found in the
-United Kingdom. Clery, in his _Minor Tactics_, p. 118, says that
-cultivated country is the most favourable to the attack, while in
-defence the country to the front cannot be too open. “In the first,
-infantry gains a succession of covered positions by means of which
-it comes on more equal terms with the defence. In the second, the
-infantry of the defence has a clear field to destroy the assailants
-as they approach.”
-
-Apart from civil war, the only possible occasion for the use of
-machine guns in the British Isles is against an invader, and it
-is well known to students of modern war that the prospects of a
-successful invasion do not depend upon the strength or weakness of
-our fleet, but on that of our army for home defence. The duty of a
-fleet in time of war is to go to sea and destroy the enemy’s ships,
-and while it is absent on this mission an opportunity for invasion
-may occur, the success of which will wholly depend upon the force
-the invader will meet on landing.
-
-The Japanese recently landed in Manchuria in spite of Russia’s
-superior naval strength; but because it was the case of an island
-invading a continent, we do not apply the lesson to ourselves, and
-are content to believe that a continent cannot invade an island.
-
-It is obvious to the military student that no invasion will be
-attempted unless its success is reasonably certain, and the
-presence of four divisions of regular troops at home renders such
-an enterprise extremely difficult, if not impossible, without
-permanent command of the sea. But these four divisions are not
-the Home Defence Force, and form that part of our Expeditionary
-Army for service outside the United Kingdom. We may, therefore,
-rest assured that as long as we retain command of the sea, no
-invasion can take place until we are involved in an over-seas war
-which requires a more or less large portion of our Expeditionary
-Force--an event which has happened almost every decade.
-
-It will be safe, therefore, to assume that in the event of an
-invasion we shall have to rely on our Territorial Army to meet the
-enemy, and it will be doing this force no injustice to assume that
-they will be compelled to act on the defensive in the face of a
-highly trained and disciplined Continental Army. Indeed, it is
-difficult for a soldier to realise how a Volunteer force, trained
-for fourteen days in the year and unacquainted with military
-discipline, can hope to meet on equal terms, even if superior by
-three to one in numbers, the pick of Continental manhood trained
-under an iron discipline for the minimum of two years.
-
-Be that as it may, it is necessary to realise the difficulties to
-be faced, not the least of which is the question of _training_,
-for, as already pointed out, it is absolutely essential to the
-successful use of machine guns that the personnel should be very
-highly trained, and this applies to their use in enclosed country
-even more than elsewhere.
-
-Although as a general principle enclosed country benefits the
-attacker and is disadvantageous to the defender, this is not
-always the case with machine guns, and provided the golden rule
-of “concealment, cover, and surprise” is intelligently applied,
-enclosed country is particularly suited for the use of machine guns
-in the defence.
-
-For this purpose machine guns should be trained to work in pairs in
-mutual support. They must be so mounted that they can be carried by
-hand for considerable distances into position, and must be capable
-of firing from a low siting when they must be inconspicuous. If
-mounted, as at present, on a wheeled carriage, a light tripod may
-be carried on the carriage, which will render the gun far more
-inconspicuous and useful.
-
-While all the principles for the tactical handling of machine guns
-with infantry hold good, there are several points of importance
-to be noted in using them in the defence in enclosed country. The
-advance of any formed bodies of the enemy will be confined to the
-roads; consequently machine guns must endeavour to command all
-roads leading from the enemy, especially where they become defiles.
-
-The hedgerows, standing crops, woods, and lanes must be used to
-afford concealment in advancing or retiring from position to
-position, and scouts must be specially trained in finding the
-easiest _concealed_ way from field to field by gates, gaps, or
-through stiles. The way from the road or lane to the selected
-position must be always marked by sticks or broken branches which
-are placed to indicate the direction of gates or gaps, or where
-a turning has to be made. The usual procedure will be for the
-scouts to work across country on one or both sides of the road. The
-section commander, who should be mounted, will select the position
-for the guns, and scouts from each gun will be sent out to guide
-them to the positions. The carriages and ammunition cart must
-move up the road to the nearest point to the position, and scouts
-should select and mark the easiest way to the carriages. Careful
-co-operation between the guns and carriages will often enable the
-latter to greatly facilitate movement, by pushing up by-lanes or
-across fields to a position near the guns. Ammunition will usually
-have to be carried to the guns by hand, so that great pains must
-be taken to get the cart as near the position as possible. The
-selection of the position will be governed by the facilities it
-presents for surprising the enemy in close formation at effective
-range. The range must be accurately found, and fire must only be
-opened by order of the section commander. In selecting a position
-care must be taken that it offers perfect concealment from view,
-and that the guns can retire under cover to their carriages. The
-neighbourhood of conspicuous objects, such as single trees, a gap
-in a fence, etc., must be carefully avoided, and care must be taken
-to secure a good field of fire for as great a distance as possible
-to the front, while the flanks and any cover within effective range
-which the enemy might occupy must be watched by scouts. It is in
-this matter of careful reconnaissance, of selecting ground and
-occupying or watching all neighbouring cover, that the successful
-use of machine guns in enclosed country mainly depends. The enemy
-is obliged by the nature of the country to move in close formation
-to pass defiles, roads, gaps, or to avoid crops, woods, and
-villages, and it is the intelligent anticipation of where this will
-occur that gives the machine gun its chance for decisive action.
-The hedges, orchards, lanes and woods, and other features will
-afford endless opportunities for bringing _flanking_ fire to bear
-on the enemy. Nothing is so effective, and the morale effect on an
-enemy who is enfiladed at close range renders it usually decisive.
-
-Cover will generally be provided by the spade, and ditches require
-little work to turn them into excellent pits, the only thing
-necessary as a rule being to excavate a hole in rear for the back
-leg of the tripod. Where there is a ditch with a hedge in front of
-it, the ditch should be improved so as to provide a pit for the gun
-to fire through the hedge about six inches above ground level. If
-the hedge is too thick to fire through, it should not be cut down,
-but a hole should be cut in the growth for the muzzle of the gun
-sufficiently large to aim through. If it is necessary to cut a gap
-in the hedge, the growth should be cut through close to the ground,
-but _without removing it_ until the moment for opening fire.
-
-Alternative positions in the same hedgerow should be avoided, as it
-is certain to be discovered immediately, and the range is probably
-already known.
-
-The edge of the wood, if it commands suitable ground, is an
-excellent position for machine guns; but if the carriages remain in
-the wood they must be provided with cover. When time and material
-are available, a good field of fire may be obtained by erecting
-a platform ten to twelve feet above the ground in the trees, and
-placing a machine gun on this; not only is the field of fire much
-increased, but the gun will be almost impossible to discover. This
-was done on one occasion in the Spanish-American War, when it met
-with considerable success.
-
-When machine guns are used for the defence of villages or farms,
-they should be placed outside the village or farm buildings well
-clear of the walls. The salient angle will usually be the most
-suitable place, a good field of fire being the chief object. The
-guns should be placed so as to flank one side of the village, and
-must be most carefully concealed, a pit being usually the best
-form of cover. Walls should as a rule be avoided, as they are very
-easily destroyed by artillery fire and always afford a conspicuous
-target.
-
-When time permits the pits should be deepened and hollowed out
-in front to afford the firers protection from artillery fire.
-Similar protection may be provided for the rest of the detachment
-by making a narrow and deep trench connected with each side of the
-gun pit. Should it be necessary to defend the village to the last,
-a second position should be provided in the centre of the village,
-commanding the main avenues, and the church tower, or roof, may
-afford a suitable site, provided artillery is not present.
-
-Although machine guns have never been used in England, they
-were employed by the French in 1871 during General Chanzy’s
-retreat from the Loire to Le Mans with great success, and this
-campaign is particularly interesting to us because the country
-greatly resembles England. Dr. Miller Maguire, in his lecture
-given at the Royal Artillery Institute on this campaign, quotes
-the German official account as follows: “The entire country is
-covered with the densest cultivation of long-standing growth,
-with vineyards, orchards, and vegetable gardens.... Owing to the
-extensive subdivision of land customary in this country, every
-property is surrounded by hedges, ditches, and walls. There are,
-consequently, numerous positions and isolated points at which
-even moderate troops could defend themselves behind good cover.
-Although the superior effect of the chassepot here ceased to
-avail, _the mitrailleuses were in their true element_, and became
-a dangerous weapon in the narrow passes.” Dr. Maguire remarks: “I
-do not know how far you will be inclined to apply those remarks to
-the circumstances of your own country in the event of invasion.
-It might be a good lesson to try; for the several arms could
-be handled between Dover and London step by step.” Later on he
-quotes from a British officer, who says: “In fact, Kent and Surrey
-combined, with vineyards instead of hop gardens, would be an exact
-picture of the country through which the Germans were pushing on.”
-
-There are numerous instances in this campaign where the
-mitrailleuse caused great loss to the Germans, and enabled the
-French to delay their advance and hold on to villages and positions
-with greatly inferior forces.
-
-Remembering that the mitrailleuse of 1870 was a clumsy and
-primitive weapon, worked by hand and mounted on a field carriage,
-there is every reason to suppose that the modern automatic machine
-gun, on its light and mobile tripod, will be still more valuable in
-fighting in enclosed country.
-
-
-
-
-CHAPTER IX
-
-MACHINE GUNS IN THE ARMIES OF THE WORLD
-
-
-AMERICA (UNITED STATES)
-
-GUN.--At present there are three machine guns in use in the United
-States, viz.:
-
- (_a_) The Gatling.
-
- (_b_) The Maxim Automatic.
-
- (_c_) The Colt Automatic.
-
-(_a_) _The Gatling._--Calibre ·3 in., and takes the service rifle
-bullet. It has 10 barrels, and is fed by a rotating cylinder. The
-gun is mounted on a shielded carriage with limber. The rate of fire
-is about 600 rounds per minute.
-
-(_b_) _The Maxim Automatic._--This is similar to the one in use in
-our own service, and takes the ·3 in. U.S. service ammunition.
-
-_Mounting._--For infantry and cavalry, a tripod mounting. For use
-in fortified works, a two-wheeled shielded carriage.
-
-The transport is by means of pack-animals. A complete outfit
-consists of five packs, _e.g._ the gun and tripod form one pack,
-and the remaining four packs carry 1,500 rounds of ammunition
-and accessories for the gun, including water for filling the
-water-jacket.
-
-For firing blank it is fitted with an attachment called the “drill
-and blank-fire attachment.”
-
-(_c_) _The Colt Automatic._--Calibre ·3 in., and takes the service
-rifle bullet. The gun is fed by means of a cartridge belt, and
-fires 400 rounds a minute.
-
-The weight is 40 lb., and the gun is mounted either on a tripod
-mounting or a wheeled carriage.
-
-A “silencer” for the Maxim was tested in March, 1909, and the
-results compared with those obtained from the gun without the
-silencer. As regards accuracy of fire there was nothing to choose
-between the two. The silencer, however, reduced the noise to that
-of a ·22 in. long cartridge, and when used at night the flash was
-entirely obliterated.
-
-ORGANISATION.--_Infantry._--One battalion in each regiment has a
-machine-gun platoon consisting of 1 sergeant, 2 corporals, and 18
-privates, and 2 guns.
-
-_Cavalry._--In a regiment of 3 squadrons, 1 squadron has a
-machine-gun platoon of 3 corporals and 18 privates.
-
-
-AUSTRIA
-
-GUN.--In 1907 after prolonged trial the Austrians definitely
-adopted the Schwarzlose. It is a very simple weapon and very
-reliable, firing 375 rounds per minute from a tripod mounting.
-
-ORGANISATION.--A section of machine guns is attached to each
-regiment of cavalry and infantry; there are also mountain companies
-of machine guns.
-
-With infantry the section consists of 2 guns; 10,000 rounds are
-carried per machine gun. The detachment consists of 14 men per gun,
-7 for actually working the gun and 7 to lead the horses. There are
-7 horses to each gun, of which 1 carries the gun and 500 rounds, 5
-carry from 1,500 to 2,000 rounds each, and 1 carries the shields.
-There is also a spare horse. For hand transport one man carries 2
-belts of 250 cartridges, another the gun and 1 belt, a third the
-mounting and 1 belt, a fourth 2 belts, a fifth the water-jacket,
-etc. The shields are left on the horse. It will be seen that when
-the machine gun is taken forward in this way it has ready for
-immediate use 1,500 rounds.
-
-With cavalry the section consists of 4 guns without shields. On
-account of the great independence of cavalry, the machine guns have
-with them 15,000 rounds each, of which 5,000 are on pack-animals
-and 10,000 in wagons. These wagons usually march in rear of the
-column. The detachment, which is all mounted, consists of 9 men per
-gun with 4 pack-horses (1 for the gun and 3 for ammunition). Hand
-transport is provided for as with the infantry machine guns.
-
-The mountain machine-gun company consists of 3 officers and 64
-other ranks. There are 4 guns carried on pack-horses, with 2
-pack-horses per gun for ammunition (4,000 rounds per gun).
-
-TACTICAL (taken from a précis of the Austrian Regulations, 1908;
-published in _Streffleurs militärische Zeitschrift_, April,
-1908).--(_a_) _With Infantry._--During the advance it is well to
-give some machine guns to the principal units of the covering
-force, for they add to their resisting power, and in the many
-phases of the preparatory fight they are sure to have opportunities
-of effecting surprise. The place for the section leader is then
-near the O.C. detachment. When the machine guns leave the column it
-is always advisable to detail a few cavalry to cover them.
-
-To take up a position it is necessary to observe the following:
-
-(1) To manœuvre out of sight of the enemy. This will often
-necessitate unloading and carrying forward the _matériel_ by hand.
-
-(2) Not to keep the guns too close together, which may cause
-additional losses. The “position of observation” will play an
-important part in the machine-gun fight.
-
-The narrow effective zone of the machine guns allows them to fire
-over the heads of other troops. Such fire will be advantageously
-employed when machine guns occupy high positions. But it is only
-allowed at ranges greater than 1,000 yards, and when the troops
-over whom they are firing are at least 400 yards from the guns.
-Under these circumstances the use of searching fire is forbidden.
-
-Both in attack and defence it is necessary to remember that
-machine guns are not suitable for a continuous fight of long
-duration. If during the preparatory fight the machine guns have
-found opportunities of opening fire, they ought, when the general
-engagement has begun, to be withdrawn from the firing line and held
-ready to act again under certain circumstances of importance.
-
-These circumstances are:
-
-In attack: to act on the enemy’s flank to facilitate the infantry
-advance; to open fire on the decisive point, whether flank or
-front, from a dominating position, either over the heads of the
-infantry or by carrying the machine guns up into the firing line.
-
-In defence: to reinforce threatened points; to stop enveloping
-movements; to repulse an assault; to take part in a counter-attack.
-
-In most cases these tasks will necessitate the machine guns being
-at once carried into the firing line to fight side by side with the
-infantry.
-
-(_b_) _With Cavalry._--The rôle of machine guns with cavalry is
-thus determined:
-
-(1) To take part in dismounted action: if pushed forward, they
-allow the number of men dismounted to be limited; if kept in
-reserve or pushed against a flank, they facilitate the success of
-the frontal attack.
-
-(2) To add considerably to the offensive and defensive power of
-patrols by replacing the battalions of chasseurs which used to be
-attached to the cavalry.
-
-(3) Finally, to take part in the cavalry fight; for this they
-should be judiciously divided among the troops of the advanced
-guard, and should make use of their mobility. This will allow
-them to open fire from well-chosen positions before the moment of
-contact, and help to obtain the desired result.
-
-The place for the machine-gun commander is near the General. If the
-machine guns have been well placed in the column, they will--thanks
-to their mobility, which is equal to that of any cavalry
-detachment--be able to make use of the considerable time required
-by a large force of cavalry to get into battle formation.
-
-Whereas with infantry the surprise of the enemy is always effected
-by making use of the features of the ground, the best method for
-cavalry guns is to utilise their rapidity of motion and their
-resemblance to other cavalry units, for which at a distance they
-are easily mistaken.
-
-The widest power of initiative is left to the commander for the
-grouping of his units in the fight. Very often he will only bring
-up near the firing line the horse carrying the gun and one carrying
-ammunition, in order to be able to escape rapidly. At other times
-all the horses will be brought up close under cover. At others the
-whole section will dash up to their position at full speed; the
-guns will be unloaded at once, and the horses will disappear to the
-rear. The one important thing is to open fire as a surprise.
-
-To sum up: the Austrian Regulations only confirm the rules already
-laid down by very competent writers who have published works
-on the subject. They enunciate in a clear and concise form the
-principles which should govern the employment of machine guns in
-various circumstances, laying particular stress on the necessity
-for constant readiness for action in a position of observation.
-
-In _Les Mitrailleuses à l’Etranger_ Lieutenant M. quotes certain
-Austrian officers who, writing before the publication of the
-Regulations of 1908, considered that the value of machine guns
-lay chiefly in their use as a reserve of fire. Lieut.-Colonel
-Berndt says: “In offence, as in defence, machine guns must be held
-back as a reserve of fire to be used at the moment when the rapid
-development of heavy fire is required.” Lieutenant Binder is of the
-same opinion, and also recommends their being used in the closest
-co-operation with the infantry. Lieutenant Hayeck-Liprandi, a
-cavalry officer, fully realises the importance of machine-guns, as
-relieving cavalry to a large degree of the necessity for dismounted
-action. He also advocates the attachment of machine-gun sections to
-regiments at the disposal of the regimental commanding officer.[61]
-
-
-CHINA
-
-GUN.--The Chinese have bought numbers of Maxims for attachment to
-their infantry. With cavalry they have adopted the Madsen.
-
-Their organisation is at present in process of evolution, and no
-official views on their tactical employment have been published
-hitherto.
-
-
-DENMARK
-
-GUN.--In 1904 Major-General Madsen, the Danish War Minister,
-invented the Rekyl (recoil) machine gun. The gun weighs only 13½
-lb., is not much longer than the service rifle, and in case of need
-can be served by one man. It has a rate of fire of 750 rounds per
-minute with a muzzle velocity of 2,350 ft. per second.
-
-ORGANISATION.--Every Hussar Squadron in the Danish Army is to have
-a section of three guns attached. The gun is carried on a horse
-together with 300 rounds of ammunition, and with each gun there is
-a led horse with reserve ammunition.
-
-TACTICS.--The gun detachment can easily and rapidly follow all
-the movements of the body of horse to which they are attached,
-even through woods. It is therefore argued that the possession of
-this weapon will do away with the necessity for dismounted cavalry
-action.
-
-
-FRANCE
-
-GUN.--France has adopted both the Puteaux and Hotchkiss patterns
-of machine gun without shields. With cavalry the question of
-mounting has not yet been definitely settled, but experiments have
-been carried out with wheeled carriages drawn by four horses. The
-infantry sections have been provided with a tripod mounting (70
-lb.), which can be adjusted to two heights, either 1 ft. 6 in. or 2
-ft. 6 in. above the ground.
-
-ORGANISATION.--At present (1909) every brigade, both of cavalry
-and of infantry, has a two-gun section attached. It is intended to
-provide every regiment with a section as soon as possible.
-
-With cavalry the detachment for each gun consists of 24 men, who
-are all mounted. The carriage carries 16,500 rounds of ammunition
-in addition to the gun.
-
-The infantry section is commanded by a lieutenant, who has under
-him one N.C.O. and 23 men, armed with rifles. There are two gun
-horses, which each carry a gun, tripod, and one box of ammunition;
-and eight ammunition horses, which each carry seven boxes, three on
-each side and one on top. A box contains 150 rounds, so that each
-section has 8,700 rounds. The “Souchier” telemeter is carried.
-
-TACTICAL.--The French Regulations are at present under
-consideration, and the tendency seems to be to follow the
-principles laid down by the Germans.
-
-M. le Commandant Niessel, in his preface to _Les Mitrailleuses à
-l’Etranger_, by Lieutenant M., says: “There is one principle which
-should dominate the whole subject and never be lost to view. It
-is that machine guns are condensed infantry, and that therefore
-it is as infantry that they should be used in battle. Together
-with accuracy and power of fire, the characteristic which should
-especially distinguish infantry in battle is their utilisation
-of every feature of the ground. Machine guns, then, to exert to
-the full their powers of effecting surprise and developing great
-intensity of fire, should reach effective and, if possible, close
-range without being observed.
-
-“Machine guns ought, then, in battle to be carried forward by
-hand by the detachment, in order to take up positions as much
-under cover as possible; this does not in any degree lessen their
-opportunities of offensive action, for there can be no hope of
-decisive success for the infantry whom they are supporting except
-in a vigorous offensive.”
-
-
-GERMANY
-
-GUN.--Germany has adopted the Maxim gun. The guns are mounted on
-sleighs which are themselves mounted on limbered gun-carriages,
-being clamped into grooves. They can either be fired from the
-carriage or be dismounted and fired from the sleigh. The gun on
-the sleigh can be adjusted to fire from a height of 1 ft. 6 in., 2
-ft. 6 in. or 3 ft. 6 in. above the ground by a simple lattice-work
-arrangement. The gun can easily be dragged to almost any position
-where men can go, and can be fired by men lying down under cover.
-
-ORGANISATION.--Machine guns have been organised into 16 batteries
-(called Sections), which are independent, and 216 companies, which
-are attached to infantry regiments.
-
-The battery consists of six machine guns, drawn by four horses and
-divided into three sections (called Divisions). There are three
-ammunition wagons and one battery wagon (1st line). There are three
-2nd-line wagons. The detachment consists of:
-
-1 captain (in command); 3 lieutenants; 1 sergeant-major; 12
-N.C.O.’s; 36 gunners; 28 drivers; 1 armourer; 1 trumpeter; 1
-apothecary (dresser); 70 horses (20 saddle and 50 draught).
-
-The men wear a special greyish-green uniform, and are armed with
-carbine and bayonet; the carbines are carried in the limbers.
-87,300 rounds are carried with each battery.
-
-Each company consists of six guns drawn by two horses, three
-wagons, and one cart. The detachment consists of:
-
-1 lieutenant (in command); 3 second lieutenants; 9 N.C.O.’s; 74
-men; 28 horses (7 saddle, 18 draught, and 3 spare).
-
-All the officers and 3 warrant officers are mounted. The men are
-armed with automatic pistols. 72,000 rounds are carried with each
-company, as follows:
-
- With the guns 18,000
- With the wagons 42,000
- With the reserve cart 12,000
- ------
- Total 72,000
- ======
-
-On going into action each gun is made up to 5,000 rounds. The
-infantry pattern range-finder is used.
-
-TACTICAL.--_Regulations for Machine-Gun Detachments in the German
-Army._
-
-_Para. 187._--Machine guns enable commanders to develop at fixed
-points the maximum volume of infantry fire on the smallest
-possible front. Machine guns can be employed in any country which
-is practicable for infantry, and when once they are unlimbered
-they must be able to surmount considerable obstacles. In action
-they offer no greater target than riflemen, fighting under like
-conditions, and they can in proportion to their fire value support
-far greater losses than infantry.
-
-When movements over the battlefield are contemplated, and the
-machine guns (unlimbered as soon as hostile fire is expected)
-are pulled or carried forward, they can utilise all cover which
-infantry is able to use. Cover that is barely sufficient for a
-section of infantry can protect an entire machine-gun detachment.
-The construction of the carriage on which guns, ammunition, and men
-can be conveyed, and the capabilities of the team, enable machine
-guns to keep up with mounted troops on the march.
-
-_Para. 188._--The range and striking effect of the machine gun is
-identical with that of the infantry rifle. The rapid succession
-of shots and the narrow concentration of the cone of dispersion,
-together with the possibilities of uniting several guns on a
-limited front, render it feasible for machine guns to obtain
-rapidly a decisive success in certain positions, and even at long
-ranges to inflict heavy losses in a short time on large and deep
-targets. Machine guns, however, are of small use to a commander
-fighting a protracted rifle-fire engagement.
-
-_Para. 189._--An engagement with a thin line of skirmishers under
-good cover should be avoided. It demands a heavy expenditure of
-ammunition which is not commensurate with the result obtained.
-During a lengthy rifle-fire action the detachments with their guns
-should be withdrawn temporarily from their position, so as to save
-their effect for a decisive moment.
-
-_Para. 190._--The engagement of hostile machine guns that offer
-a difficult target is by no means the chief duty of machine-gun
-detachments; in most cases it will be more profitable to leave this
-to other arms. When engaging hostile machine guns the most accurate
-information should be sought regarding the enemy’s position.
-
-_Para. 191._--Machine-gun detachments can at all times and under
-all conditions confidently await the attacks of hostile cavalry.
-To meet these any formation can be adopted which allows of a
-well-directed and calmly delivered fire being poured into the
-advancing cavalry. Both when firing from the carriage and from the
-gun dismounted the fire must be distributed all along the advancing
-line of cavalry; special attention must be paid to the supporting
-lines, to one’s own flanks, and to the defence of the carriages
-when the guns are separated from them. Machine-gun detachments
-are able to advance in the open fields without any fear of the
-enemy’s cavalry, provided the latter is not supported by artillery
-or infantry, or is not in such force as to be able to attack
-simultaneously from different sides in several lines.
-
-_Para. 192._--In action against artillery it should be remembered
-that at long ranges the superiority of fire will always remain with
-this branch. If machine guns are to engage artillery, the sleighs
-must be brought as near as possible to it. The rapidity of movement
-of machine guns due to their being horsed will enable them to start
-the action from a flank, and thus produce a sensible increase of
-effect. Scattering the fire from all the machine guns along the
-entire line of a battery is as useless as it is purposeless.
-
-_Para. 193._--Machine-gun detachments should generally be employed
-undivided; on special occasions separate sections may be made to
-act independently. The detachment commander will decide as to the
-distribution of the ammunition train to the individual sections.
-The employment of single machine-gun detachments will be seldom
-advisable. In such cases the senior detachment leader will command
-the entire force of machine guns.
-
-_Para. 194._--In view of the uses to which machine-gun
-detachments may be applied, and with the object of increasing
-their independence of action, it is desirable that a few mounted
-men should be attached to them for reconnaissance. Otherwise
-the readiness of machine guns is such that it is only in very
-obstructed and overgrown country that they require special
-protection. Here it may be necessary, in order to secure the
-threatened flanks and rear, and to protect the carriages left
-behind, to detail small parties of cavalry or infantry. An
-application for such from a machine-gun commander should be
-complied with by any infantry or cavalry commander in the vicinity.
-
-_Para. 196._--Machine guns can never replace artillery.
-
-_Para. 197._--Machine guns will always find their chief work to
-be at the place where their powerful fire effect, together with
-their mobility (on the march) and the advantage of being able to
-get across country when separated from their carriage, can best be
-utilised.
-
-_Para. 198._--For the correct manœuvring of machine guns it is
-necessary to possess a clear knowledge of the general situation,
-of the aims of the commander, and of the state of the action. The
-disposal of the machine-gun detachments rests with the superior
-command. By attaching machine-gun detachments to stated bodies of
-troops, the full value of the former in action can only be realised
-in exceptional cases.
-
-_Para. 199._--All commanders must quickly make their dispositions
-to suit the situation, and must always realise that neglect and
-delay are a more serious hindrance to success than an error in the
-choice of means.
-
-_Para. 200._--At the commencement of an action the commander will
-proceed to the O.C. troops, or to the commander of the force to
-which his detachment is detailed, and receive the necessary orders
-for the impending action. It is his duty, in case of emergency, to
-act on his own initiative. During the progress of the action he
-will remain in constant communication with that commanding officer,
-in order to keep him constantly informed of what he is doing, and
-in turn to be posted in the progress of the fight.
-
-_Para. 201._--In choosing a position the first condition to fulfil
-is to obtain the best possible fire effect for the task in hand;
-then secondly one may think of cover.
-
-_Para. 202._--The choice of every position must be preceded by
-special reconnoitring, the opportune and skilful performance of
-which is essential to success. This includes ascertaining what
-the targets are, where there are suitable fire positions, and the
-facilities for approach, the nature of the ground to be crossed,
-and lastly what security is offered against surprises.
-
-_Para. 203._--In the advance and in defensive positions the
-commander reconnoitres himself. During retirements the commander
-remains with the detachment so long as it is within effective range
-of the enemy, but sends back for reconnoitring purposes a senior
-officer. Before occupying a position the commander, if possible,
-must have examined it himself.
-
-_Para. 205._--The attention of the enemy must not be previously
-directed to the position selected. A personal inspection is often
-to be carried out only on foot, leaving all escort behind.
-
-_Para. 206._--The following points guide the choice of position:
-an open field of fire; a front lying as far as possible at right
-angles to the line of fire; plenty of space; possibility of
-sweeping all the ground right up to the closest range; concealment,
-and facilities for communication along and behind the line of fire.
-
-_Para. 207._--Positions close to or on a level with a point to
-which the enemy has ranged are to be avoided as much as possible.
-Similarly it is not advisable to take up a position in close
-proximity to prominent objects, still less straight in front of
-them, as they facilitate the enemy’s ranging. On the other hand, a
-position in front of a dark background or in a place covered with
-vegetation hinders the enemy from picking up the target.
-
-Every kind of concealment, even of an artificial nature, offers
-advantages, because the observation of the enemy is thereby impeded.
-
-_Para. 208._--During the advance and in moving into position
-security should not be overlooked. On threatened flanks special
-scouts must be sent out by the officer who is bringing up the
-troops, especially in close country. These should not ride far
-ahead, but should bear in mind to keep in touch with the troops.
-During the advance roads should be used as long as possible.
-
-_Para. 210._--The pace of the advance and the moment of unlimbering
-depend on the object of the commander, the state of the action,
-the nature of the country and the state of the ground.
-
-_Para. 211._--The dispositions for taking up a position must be
-made in time to avoid any delay in opening fire. Every effort
-must be made to take up a position unobserved, and to open fire
-by surprise. Both of these are, however, only possible if special
-attention is paid to the utilisation of cover during the advance to
-the position, thus keeping the enemy in ignorance of the locality
-which it is intended to occupy. In the absence of cover, or when
-immediate entry into action is required, the surprise of the enemy
-must be effected by rapidity in occupying a position.
-
-_Para. 213._--The most favourable position must be sought for each
-individual weapon with regard to fire effect and cover. As a rule
-there is an interval of 20 paces between guns, but the direction
-and regularity of the intervals in the detachment are not to be
-insisted upon. It must be considered, however, that the losses
-caused by the enemy’s fire will be heavier in proportion as the
-machine guns are posted closer together. Care must be taken that
-the individual guns do not interfere with one another’s fire.
-Placing single guns in echelon may offer advantages where the
-flanks are threatened.
-
-When the nature of the ground or of the target renders a more
-careful choice necessary for each gun, it is recommended that this
-be carried out by the No. 1 of the gun.
-
-_Para. 214._--The decision to open fire must not be made too
-hastily. It is to be borne in mind that the fire can only have a
-decisive effect when it is directed against troops situated within
-effective range. The arm to which they belong has little to do
-with the question; the decisive point in choice of target is first
-and foremost the momentary tactical importance of that target.
-Afterwards fire must be turned on to those targets which, owing to
-their height, depth, breadth, and density, render a high percentage
-of hits probable.
-
-_Para. 215._--Good results from indirect fire can only be achieved
-if the range and position of the target are known, or if the fall
-or the effect of the shots can be observed from a point close to
-the detachment.
-
-_Para. 216._--Firing over one’s own troops is only permissible when
-the nature of the ground renders possible the deployment of several
-firing lines one above the other.
-
-_Para. 217._--Firing by night can only promise success if the
-guns can be trained by daylight on to points where the enemy is
-expected, or if well-lit objects are taken as targets, such as
-bivouacs or camps.
-
-_Para. 218._--From the very beginning of an action it must be
-remembered that the number of cartridges carried is limited, and
-that the consumption of ammunition implies an expenditure of power
-which should only be made when it will meet with success. Should
-the decision be taken, however, to fire on a given target, the
-ammunition necessary to attain the object of the action must be
-expended. Fire with an insufficient effect weakens the morale of
-the troops, whilst it encourages the enemy.
-
-_Para. 219._--The losses inflicted on the enemy will affect him
-more if he incurs them in a short space of time, than if they are
-distributed over a long period; it is advisable therefore in most
-cases, even in the face of a weaker enemy, to open fire with the
-whole detachment rather than with one or two sections only.
-
-The expenditure of ammunition necessary for the silencing of the
-enemy will in both cases be about the same, but in the former case
-one’s own loss will be appreciably smaller.
-
-_Para. 220._--A change of objective should not be made until the
-result aimed at against the first target has been fully realised. A
-frequent change of objective weakens the fire, and should therefore
-be avoided.
-
-_Para. 221._--A distribution of fire over several objectives cannot
-be avoided under all circumstances, but it must not resolve itself
-into an aimless scattering of fire.
-
-_Para. 222._--In every case coolness, marksmanship, and strict fire
-discipline are necessary to get full value in fire effect. In an
-engagement, should the majority of those in command be put out of
-action, fire discipline must still be preserved. With well-trained
-and well-disciplined troops, the presence of mind of the individual
-soldier, and the example of stout-hearted and cool-headed men will
-ensure a successful conclusion to an engagement fought against an
-enemy in a similar plight.
-
-_Para. 223._--The officer commanding the troops announces the
-object of the action, and also the objective in a general way.
-
-_Para. 224._--The machine-gun detachment commander selects the
-positions, determines the range, names the targets in detail
-together with the nature of attack on them, and orders the opening
-of fire.
-
-_Para. 225._--The section commander passes on the orders. He
-decides the place for each gun, also the portion of the objective
-to be fired at, and the range for each individual weapon. He
-observes the service of the guns, and is especially responsible
-that the correct target is fired at and for the fire action of his
-section.
-
-_Para. 226._--The No. 1 of the gun selects the spot to place his
-gun, and the most suitable height for it to stand above ground,
-follows in detail all orders, and ensures (using in case of
-necessity independent measures) that the centre of the cone of
-dispersion falls on the target. He is responsible for the service
-of the gun in detail, and attentively watches the weapon so as to
-remedy any defects which might interfere with its fire effect.
-
-_Para. 227._--By a correct utilisation of the degree of
-independence allotted to each individual commander, by a rapid
-and accurate ascertaining of ranges, by a correct judgment of the
-influence of the weather on the cone of dispersion, it is possible
-to avoid an interruption of the fire of the whole detachment for an
-alteration of the sights. Any such interruption must be especially
-avoided when it is obvious from the nature of the objective that
-it will only be in view a short time. Again, when firing at such
-objectives, no time must be lost by giving a long and detailed
-description of the target.
-
-A well-trained detachment should be able to get quickly on to the
-target, and to distribute its fire advantageously on receiving
-brief words of command. If one part of the enemy is silenced or has
-vanished, the fire must at once be independently directed on the
-still visible and active part of the objective.
-
-_Para. 228._--The position of the commander is of importance for
-issuing commands and controlling the fire. In peace exercises
-all commanders must issue their orders from the same positions
-and in the same attitude they would adopt in actual warfare. The
-commander may allow himself to depart from this rule, and order the
-subordinate commanders to do the same, in so far as such a step is
-necessary for instructional purposes. Moreover, it must be strongly
-insisted upon that no man should expose himself more than is
-absolutely necessary for the observation of the general situation,
-the service of the guns, the conveyance of ammunition, and the
-taking of ranges.
-
- * * * * *
-
-_Para. 242._--In an action of two forces meeting, the advanced
-guard must secure time and space for the main body to deploy. As
-the accomplishment of this duty depends essentially on the rapid
-occupation of favourable points on the ground, the allotment of
-machine guns to the advanced guard will be highly advantageous. On
-the arrival of the infantry the machine guns must be withdrawn from
-the firing line, and kept in readiness for further employment.
-
-_Para. 243._--In an attack on a fully developed and defended front,
-the machine guns will as a rule be kept back. They constitute a
-highly mobile reserve at the disposal of the G.O.C., which may
-be used for the speedy reinforcement of threatened points, for
-acting against the flanks of an enemy, and for the preparation of
-an attempt to break his line. The attack in view has a chance of
-success only when superiority of fire is established. For this
-purpose machine guns possess ample mobility to enable them to
-follow infantry advancing to the attack. That they should join in
-the rushes of the firing line is no more required of them than that
-they should join in the charge.
-
-Under skilful and judicious leadership they will nevertheless be
-able to come so close to the enemy as to take part in the decisive
-fire engagement; the temporary increase of distance from the
-carriages need not be considered.
-
-It is of exceptional advantage to direct the fire against the point
-of the enemy’s line selected for the attack from a commanding
-position, or from a flank, since under these circumstances it
-is not necessary to cease fire when the infantry continue their
-advance, and prepare for the final rush. Should such a position be
-reached at a range which admits of the maximum fire effect (800
-yards or under) any further forward movement of the machine guns is
-wrong; it interrupts the fire effect and entails fresh laying and
-ranging.
-
-_Para. 244._--In the event of a successful issue of the action, the
-machine guns must co-operate with the first pursuit by a lavish use
-of their fire power. As soon as the victory is assured they will be
-hurried forward into the captured position to support the infantry
-in their occupation of the same, and to crush the last powers of
-resistance of the enemy.
-
-_Para. 245._--Should the attack fail, the machine guns must support
-the retiring troops.
-
-_Para. 246._--In using machine guns in defence, one must consider
-that the guns are not suitable for conducting a protracted action
-for any space of time, and that the advantage of the machine
-guns’ mobility cannot be utilised if a fixed part of the position
-is handed over to them for defence at the outset. It is to be
-recommended generally, and particularly in the defence, to keep the
-guns at first with the reserve, and to utilise them as the need
-arises--to strengthen the defending line at threatened points,
-to hinder outflanking, and to repel an attempt at storming the
-position, or for offensive movements. This does not always exclude
-machine guns from entering into action at the commencement of an
-engagement, _e.g._ if it is necessary to command certain important
-approaches. Also, if a covered retreat for the machine guns is
-assured, it will be possible to place them to the front or to the
-side of the main line of defence, so that they can sweep with their
-fire the country which the enemy will presumably occupy with his
-artillery.
-
-At times a flanking machine-gun fire can be used to sweep dead
-ground in front of the line of battle.
-
-_Para. 247._--In all cases where machine guns are placed in
-positions selected beforehand, cover must be constructed. If the
-time is not sufficient for this, an attempt must at least be made
-to arrange some artificial concealment, to improve the field of
-fire, and to determine ranges.
-
-_Para. 248._--After a successful action machine-gun detachments
-must be utilised in the boldest fashion, to turn the victory
-to account during the pursuit. They are highly suitable for
-this purpose, as they unite great power of fire with rapidity
-of movement. The pursuit must be continued as long as strength
-permits. The machine guns will approach to within effective range
-of the enemy, and hinder every attempt of the adversary to re-form
-and take up a position. Flanking fire is especially effective. A
-liberal supply of ammunition must be pushed forward, this being
-necessary for the energetic maintenance of fire in pursuit.
-
-_Para. 249._--When breaking off an action in the event of
-an unsuccessful issue, the machine-gun detachment can render
-considerable service by opposing the enemy, regardless of the
-possible loss of the guns, and by pouring a vigorous fire into
-him. For keeping the enemy in check, positions behind defiles with
-covered lines of retreat are especially suitable.
-
-Special importance must be attached to the provision of sufficient
-ammunition, to the thorough reconnaissance of the lines of retreat,
-and to the correct estimation of the moment for beginning to
-retire, especially when the movement is to be carried out in
-echelon. To avoid obstruction the ammunition wagons must be moved
-away at the right moment. Increased attention must be paid to the
-flanks, since it is from these that danger most threatens during
-a retreat. If suitable positions can be occupied on the flanks,
-increased facilities for conducting the retreat will be obtained by
-utilising them.
-
-_Para. 250._--Machine guns attached to independent cavalry might
-be used to increase the power of cavalry, mounted and dismounted,
-and on the offensive and defensive. The duties that will fall
-on machine guns in this service demand great mobility and the
-strictest fire discipline.
-
-_Para. 251._--The commander of the independent cavalry will
-make all decisions regarding the employment of machine guns. He
-communicates all his plans of action to the machine gun commander,
-and provides him further with special orders concerning the first
-entry into action of the machine guns. If the machine guns are
-not to be used, it is advisable to leave them behind in a suitable
-covering position.
-
-_Para. 252._--On reconnaissance duty with the cavalry, machine guns
-will be most frequently employed in breaking down the resistance of
-the enemy at small posts or defiles which they have occupied, or
-vice versa--to stiffen the opposition made by the cavalry at such
-points. On such an occasion even the assistance of a single section
-with its ammunition will be of use to the cavalry detachment.
-
-_Para. 253._--In the advance of cavalry against cavalry the
-machine-gun detachments must take up their positions as soon as
-possible, so as to support first the deployment, and then the
-attack of the cavalry. The most advantageous position will be well
-to the front and to a flank of the advancing cavalry, since from
-there a continuation of the fire is rendered possible up to the
-moment almost of the charge, and at the same time an outflanking
-movement of the enemy is prevented on that side. A position secure
-against direct attack is to be desired, yet a consideration of
-the effect gained by the position described above precedes all
-thought of cover. A change of position is almost always out of the
-question, owing to the rapid development of a mounted action.
-
-_Para. 254._--A wide separation of the sections is not advisable,
-since several lines of fire hamper the movements of cavalry.
-
-_Para. 255._--In a forward movement of the machine guns when
-limbered up, decreasing the intervals to less than 10 paces must be
-avoided, since smaller spaces render difficult the passage of the
-limbers to the rear.
-
-_Para. 256._--During the fight the detachment commander will have
-to act on his own responsibility, according to the state of the
-action. He must not wait for orders, and must always watch the
-cavalry engagement; he must use every opportunity to join in the
-issue at stake and make preparation for decisive action in case of
-either a successful or an unsuccessful termination of the struggle.
-Under certain conditions it may be advantageous to await events
-with his guns ready to march.
-
-_Para. 257._--In the event of a favourable issue of the action, it
-will be his duty to follow the beaten enemy with his fire and to
-prevent him from offering further resistance.
-
-_Para. 258._--The nature of a cavalry engagement will often render
-it necessary to keep the carriages close to the guns or to shoot
-from the wheeled carriages. Since the massing of several carriages
-in rear of the detachment offers the enemy a favourable opportunity
-for attack and impedes firing towards the rear, the question will
-arise whether the ammunition wagons should be kept back in a secure
-place.
-
-_Para. 260._--The machine-gun detachments attached to the cavalry
-divisions remain with them in action. They will find occasion
-to prove of service in the varied duties of cavalry during and
-especially after action.
-
-_Para. 261._--Also for protecting batteries in position, machine
-guns can be profitably employed, if infantry are not forthcoming
-for this duty.
-
-
-_Extract from “Field Service Regulations, 1908”_
-
-“The fire effect of machine guns is influenced primarily by correct
-sighting, possibility of observation, size and density of target,
-and methods of fire.”
-
-“It is further affected by the suddenness with which fire is
-opened, by the number of machine guns firing at the same target,
-and by the enemy’s fire. The high rate of fire concentration of the
-bullet-sheaf, and the possibility of bringing several machine guns
-into action on a narrow front, enable great effect to be produced
-in a short time even at long ranges. When the front of the target
-is broken and irregular, the effect is reduced. A wrong sighting
-elevation or an imperfect observation of fire may render the fire
-completely ineffective.”
-
-“Dense lines of skirmishers standing suffer heavy losses at ranges
-of 1,650 yards and under. At lines of skirmishers lying, good
-effect is to be expected at 1,100 yards and under, provided that
-the observation of fire is good. Against artillery in action the
-fire is similar to that of infantry. Owing to the mobility of
-machine-gun batteries they are especially adapted for securing the
-increased fire effect due to _oblique_ fire.”
-
-“At short ranges under hostile fire machine guns can only be
-brought up and withdrawn under cover.”
-
- * * * * *
-
-The German _Cavalry Drill Book_ of 1909 has some interesting
-paragraphs on the employment of machine guns, which are here given:
-
-_Para. 497._--Horse artillery and machine guns, by reason of their
-fire, enhance the offensive and defensive powers of cavalry. In
-defence and against unexpected opening of fire they form the most
-effective portion of the force.
-
-_Para. 498._--Horse-artillery fire will often be the first thing to
-make the enemy disclose his dispositions, and thus is useful for
-reconnaissance. In conjunction with machine guns it can break down
-the enemy’s resistance in defiles, and thus save the cavalry the
-necessity of dismounted action.
-
-_Para. 498._--Artillery and machine guns enable the cavalry, ...
-especially by fire effect upon their flanks, to distract hostile
-columns from their line of march.
-
-_Para. 500._--Detached forces of the Division may be allotted
-artillery and machine guns to increase their powers of offensive
-action.... The employment of single machine guns is forbidden.
-
-_Para. 501._--The commanders of artillery and machine guns must
-be kept informed of the situation and of the cavalry commander’s
-intentions. They remain with him until the employment of their
-commands has been arranged for; and, if necessary, it is their
-duty to bring this question of employment to his notice. At later
-stages they must keep in constant communication with him. Guns and
-machine guns come into action for the first time by order of the
-leader.
-
-_Para. 502._--As a general principle, fire is to be opened on those
-portions of the enemy the defeat of which is likely to influence
-the decision of the fight. Under anything like equal conditions, a
-duel with the hostile artillery cannot lead to rapid results. But
-should the hostile artillery expose itself, the opportunity must be
-seized with rapidity and energy. It may be also necessary to engage
-hostile artillery in order to draw their fire from the cavalry.
-
-_Para. 503._--Fire control is facilitated by keeping the batteries
-together, nor is any great dispersion of the machine-gun sections,
-as a rule, to be recommended. Many lines of fire cramp the
-movements of cavalry during the mounted combat. The conditions
-of the fight, however, or the configuration of the ground, may
-necessitate dispersions and separate positions.... Machine guns
-only require an escort when the field of view is very restricted.
-
-_Para. 507._--In the _mounted cavalry combat_ guns and machine
-guns must be brought into action so as to support, firstly, the
-deployment; secondly, the attack. Positions for the machine guns,
-to a flank and in front of the advancing cavalry, all on rising
-ground, will allow fire to be maintained until immediately before
-the collision, and will make it difficult for the enemy to
-envelop a flank. On the other hand, the disadvantage is that any
-large flank movement takes time, and sometimes so much time that
-the decisive moment may pass while it is being carried out, and
-the guns may arrive too late.... It is desirable that artillery
-positions should be secured from direct attack by the nature of
-the ground. But if circumstances demand it, artillery and machine
-guns must come into action on the spot, without regard for cover or
-other advantages.
-
-_Para. 509._--Unless fresh bodies of cavalry offer a tempting
-target, fire will be turned on to the hostile batteries and machine
-guns immediately after the collision of the cavalry masses.
-
-_Para. 510._--During the fight the leaders of artillery and machine
-guns will for the most part have to act on their own initiative.
-They must seek every opportunity for intervention, and, according
-to the course of the fight, must make preparations for action under
-favourable or unfavourable conditions. On occasions it may be
-necessary to remain limbered up and ready to move.
-
-_Para. 511._--After a successful attack artillery and machine
-guns advance rapidly to follow up the beaten enemy with fire, and
-to prevent his rallying for renewed opposition. If the result be
-unfavourable, artillery and machine-gun leaders must come to a
-timely decision whether the circumstances call for a retirement to
-a covering position, or whether they should not hold on to their
-fire position even at the risk of losing the guns.
-
-_Para. 512._--Owing to the character of the cavalry encounter, it
-is often advisable to keep the limbers with the guns. And it may
-sometimes be well to leave a portion of the second-line wagons
-and the carts of the machine-gun detachments behind in a place of
-security, and to order the light-ammunition column to march at
-the head of the second-line transport. Yet another question may
-arise for the machine-gun detachments; whether to take the wheeled
-carriage or only the sleigh mountings into the firing line.
-
-_Para. 513._--If the assault succeeds, guns and machine guns hurry
-to the captured position to take part in the pursuit.
-
-Should their own attack fail, or should that of the enemy succeed,
-artillery and machine guns must endeavour to cover the retirement,
-and, disregarding the hostile artillery, must turn their fire into
-pursuing riflemen.
-
- * * * * *
-
-In a recent article in the _Jahrbücher für die Deutschen Armeen und
-Marine_ Captain von Beckmann gives the following summary of the
-tactical use of machine guns:--
-
-1. Machine guns must take up the smallest possible space, and be
-capable of quickly coming into action (at rifle ranges). They must
-be capable of accompanying infantry and cavalry wherever these arms
-can go.
-
-2. They can never take the place of artillery, though capable,
-especially at short ranges, of affording effective support to the
-latter.
-
-3. The fire of one machine gun is approximately equivalent to that
-of 80 infantrymen. The dispersion of fire is considerably less;
-therefore while the effect is greater with an accurate sight, it is
-less if the range is not accurately known.
-
-4. The most suitable targets are those of some size and
-depth--_e.g._ infantry columns, cavalry in all formations, and
-artillery when limbered up. At medium ranges, extended firing lines
-may be fired upon, but little effect can be produced upon men lying
-down, even at the shortest ranges--though the morale effect may be
-considerable.
-
-5. Short bursts of heavy fire are especially effective. On the
-other hand, long-continued fire is unsuitable, owing to the
-expenditure of ammunition and the heating of the barrel.
-
-6. Artillery in position provided with shields can only be
-effectively damaged by enfilade or oblique fire.
-
-7. Machine guns may either be employed directly under the orders
-of the G.O.C. or be attached to certain units. In the first case
-they will usually act in complete machine-gun units. In the second
-case they will generally do so only at suitable targets at long
-and medium ranges. In the later stages they will mostly be used in
-sections. The use of single machine guns is to be avoided.
-
-8. The intervals between machine guns in action must depend on
-circumstances. They should not be too small if the guns are to
-hold their ground for any length of time. When a section (2 guns)
-is acting alone, the guns must be able to afford effective mutual
-support in all directions.
-
-9. Ammunition must be carefully husbanded, especially at the longer
-ranges, while a good supply of ammunition is essential. Even
-at long ranges, this ammunition will have to be carried by men
-specially equipped for the purpose.
-
-10. When the enemy is unexpectedly met with while on the march,
-machine guns will be of special value to the advance guard in
-rapidly seizing points in order to hold the enemy at a distance.
-The occupation of such points at wide intervals will often
-effectively deceive the enemy as to the strength of the force.
-Machine guns thus employed will be withdrawn as soon as the
-infantry come up and deploy, so as to be available for other work.
-
-11. The wide extensions of modern armies will often make it
-impossible for any but mounted troops to be concentrated
-at decisive points--either to make the most of favourable
-opportunities, or to ward off an unexpected danger. Mounted
-machine-gun detachments will be very valuable for such purposes.
-
-12. In the attack of a defensive position deliberately occupied,
-part of the machine guns will at first be held in reserve, but,
-according to the latest opinions formed from the lessons of the
-Russo-Japanese War, the majority of the machine guns will support
-the advance of the infantry. They are especially effective in
-keeping down the defenders’ fire during the last stage of the
-attack when the artillery is no longer able to fire over the heads
-of the infantry.
-
-13. On the defensive it is advisable that a considerable number of
-machine guns should be held in reserve, especially with a view to
-preventing any unexpected turning movements, repelling assaults,
-delivering counter-attacks, and in case of such reinforcing any
-threatened points in the line of defence. In fortified positions
-machine guns may be usefully employed in front of the position to
-force the enemy to deploy prematurely. His artillery as it comes
-into action will frequently offer very suitable targets. The
-majority of machine guns, however, will be placed in the line of
-defence (or at least immediately in rear of the sections to which
-they are allotted) as soon as the direction of the enemy’s attack
-has been ascertained. This presence in the front line will make it
-possible to reduce the number of men actually in that line and will
-thus economise troops.
-
-14. In the pursuit machine guns will be especially effective
-against the flanks and rear of the retiring enemy. Again, in
-covering a retirement and checking the enemy’s pursuit, machine
-guns with cavalry and artillery will delay the enemy’s advance and
-enable their own infantry to break away. In this case the first
-duty will be to protect their own artillery.
-
-15. With the Independent Cavalry machine guns form a very valuable
-addition to the effective strength both for defence and offence.
-Even in reconnaissance work they will be able to break down the
-enemy’s resistance at certain points (villages) and to increase
-the tenacity of their own forces in the defence of similar points.
-Light machine guns carried on the saddle would be of the greatest
-assistance to smaller bodies of cavalry in such circumstances.
-Machine guns are also valuable in purely cavalry engagements,
-especially when it is possible for them to take the enemy in flank.
-If this be impossible, they can effectively follow up a success, or
-cover the retirement of their own cavalry. If some of the machine
-guns act as escort to the artillery, the cavalry escort can be
-dispensed with. This will increase the effective strength of the
-cavalry and also give the artillery a wide choice of position and
-great security, thus increasing its efficiency. Even if at the
-beginning the cavalry commander himself directs the working of the
-machine guns, the officer commanding the latter will have to act
-on his own initiative later on, in accordance with the tactical
-situation of the moment.
-
-
-GREAT BRITAIN
-
-ORGANISATION.--Great Britain was one of the earliest countries to
-adopt machine guns, and the Maxim has been in use for the last
-twenty years. Machine guns are organised in sections of two guns,
-and a section forms part of each regiment of cavalry and battalion
-of infantry, who provide and train the personnel.
-
-The organisation is as follows:--
-
-
-A SECTION WITH A CAVALRY REGIMENT
-
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
- Personnel. |Riding horses.|Draught horses.
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
- Lieutenant 1 | 3 | --
- Sergeant 1 | 1 | --
- Corporal 1 | 1 | --
- Privates 12 | 12 | --
- Drivers 8 | -- | 16
- Bâtman 2 | -- | --
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
- 25 (1 officer) | 17 | 16
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
-
-_Equipment._--6 pack-saddles (the two lead horses of each wagon are
-provided with pack saddlery); 4 G.S. limbered wagons (2 for guns
-and 2 for ammunition); 2 machine guns with tripods and pack-saddles
-on limbered G.S. wagons, each drawn by 4 horses.
-
-_Ammunition._--3,500 rounds with each gun; 16,000 with regimental
-reserve; 10,000 with brigade ammunition column; 10,000 with
-divisional ammunition column for each gun respectively.
-
-
-SECTION WITH AN INFANTRY BATTALION
-
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
- Personnel. |Riding horses.|Draught horses.
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
- Subaltern 1 | 1 | --
- Sergeant 1 | -- | --
- Corporal 1 | -- | --
- Privates 12 | -- | --
- Drivers | |
- (1st-line | |
- transport) 2 | -- | 4
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
- Total 17 (1 officer) | 1 | 4
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
-
-
-[Illustration: MACHINE GUN ON ADJUSTABLE TRIPOD BEHIND COVER.
-FRONT VIEW.
-
-_By Permission of Messrs. Vickers, Sons & Maxim, Ltd._]
-
-[Illustration: MACHINE GUN ON ADJUSTABLE TRIPOD BEHIND COVER.
-VIEW FROM REAR.
-
-_By Permission of Messrs. Vickers, Sons & Maxim, Ltd._]
-
-_Equipment._--2 machine guns with tripods on 1 limbered G.S. wagon
-drawn by 2 horses.
-
-_Ammunition._--3,500 rounds with each gun; 8,000 with regimental
-reserve; 10,000 with brigade ammunition column; 10,000 with
-divisional ammunition column for each gun respectively.
-
-
-TERRITORIAL FORCE: SECTION WITH AN INFANTRY BATTALION
-
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
- Personnel. |Riding horses.|Draught horses.
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
- Subaltern 1 | 1 | --
- Sergeant 1 | -- | --
- Rank and | |
- File 15 | -- | 2
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
- | |
- Total 17 (1 officer) | 1 | 2
- ---------------------------+--------------+---------------
-
-_Equipment._--2 machine guns on field carriages each drawn by 1
-horse.
-
-_Ammunition._--4,000 with the guns; 6,000 with regimental reserve;
-10,000 with brigade ammunition column.
-
-
-SECTION WITH A YEOMANRY REGIMENT
-
- ----------------------+------------------+----------------
- Personnel. | Riding horses. | Draught horses.
- ----------------------+------------------+----------------
- Subaltern 1 | 2 | --
- Sergeant 1 | 1 | --
- Corporal 1 | 1 | --
- Privates 12 | 12 | --
- Drivers 4 | -- | 8
- Bâtman 2 | -- | --
- ----------------------+------------------+----------------
- Total 21 | 16 | 8
- ----------------------+------------------+----------------
-
-_Equipment._--2 carts for guns, tripods, and 2 sets of
-pack-saddlery; and 2 carts for machine-gun ammunition.
-
-_Ammunition._--3,500 rounds with each gun; 6,000 with regimental
-reserve; 10,000 with brigade ammunition column.
-
-MOUNTING.--There are five English patterns of tripods in use and
-one Indian. Marks I. and II. English pattern and the Indian pattern
-are exceedingly clumsy, and have been largely replaced by Marks
-III., III.A, and IV. Mark III. weighs 49 lb., and consists of a
-crosshead and pivot mounted on three legs with a saddle for firer,
-and has elevating and traversing gears. A traverse of 25 degrees
-can be obtained. The two front legs of the tripod are pivoted in
-sockets and secured by wing nuts, and can be splayed to lower the
-gun, and fold up for transport. The legs are fitted with shoes
-to steady the mounting by gripping the ground. When firing, the
-ammunition box is placed on the ground on the right side of the gun.
-
-On the pack-saddle the gun and tripod are carried on either side
-of the saddle on hooks and secured by straps. The tool box is
-carried on the top of the saddle. With this mounting 4,000 rounds
-of ammunition are carried in eight boxes, four on each side of the
-ammunition pack-saddle on a second animal.
-
-Mark III.A tripod weighs 56 lb., and differs from Mark III. as
-follows:
-
-1. The pivot has a bearing surface to support the rear end of
-crosshead arm.
-
-2. The hand nut of elevating gear is formed with four small radial
-holes.
-
-3. The rear leg is telescopic, and consists of an inner and outer
-tube. The inner tube has a shoe, and the rear end of the outer tube
-has a bracket for the saddle and a handle to clamp the inner to the
-outer tube.
-
-The Mark IV. tripod weighs 48 lb., and the mounting consists of
-a crosshead, elevating gear, and socket mounted on three legs.
-It has 13 degrees elevation and 25 degrees depression, but by
-arranging the position of legs 43 degrees and 55 degrees can be
-had. It has an all-round traverse. The elevating gear is actuated
-by a hand-wheel, which consists of an inner and an outer screw.
-The legs are of tubular steel, the lower ends being fitted with
-shoes to steady the mountings, and the upper ends have a joint
-with serrations; the rear leg has a joint pin with nut and jamming
-handle. Joint studs with disc springs and jamming handles are fixed
-to the front legs, by which the legs are securely clamped in the
-required position. Numbers are stamped on the legs to show the
-relative position of the legs to their normal position. The legs
-are secured by a leather strap for transport. When firing, the
-ammunition box is placed on the ground on the right side of the
-gun. The gun can be fired at heights varying from 14½ inches to 30
-inches above the ground.
-
-TACTICAL.--Directions for the use of machine guns are found in the
-various textbooks issued for each arm. Training is dealt with in
-the _Handbook for ·303 Machine Guns_, 1907, and in the _Training
-Manuals Appendix_, 1905. The following directions for their
-employment in the field are from the latter, ch. vi. pp. 157-63:
-
-_Para. 2._--Surprise is a powerful factor in the effective
-employment of the machine gun; every effort must therefore be
-made to avoid the enemy’s observations both when advancing to a
-position and when in action. The machine gun possesses the power of
-delivering, from a very narrow front, a practically uninterrupted
-volume of closely concentrated rifle fire, which can be directed
-against any desired object with the least possible delay. The
-delivery of such fire cannot, however, be long sustained, because
-of the heavy expenditure of ammunition involved and the difficulty
-of replacing it.
-
-It is necessary, therefore, for its effective use, that its
-movements and fire action should be so regulated as to enable it
-to open fire rapidly whenever a favourable target presents itself,
-for the losses inflicted on an enemy will affect him in proportion
-to the suddenness and rapidity with which they are experienced.
-As the rôle of machine guns is to assist the particular body of
-troops to which they belong, the machine-gun commander should be
-fully acquainted with the orders issued to such troops. He should
-also carefully watch and conform to their movements, and assist
-them by every means in his power. As a rule the guns belonging to a
-unit will be employed singly in order to obviate the concentration
-of hostile fire against them, the most favourable position being
-sought for each weapon with regard to fire effect and cover; this,
-however, should not prevent the guns being used together when the
-circumstances of the moment demand the adoption of such a course.
-The massing of guns should be rarely resorted to. When it is
-desired to bring an overwhelming fire to bear on any locality, it
-should be accomplished by the concentration of fire from dispersed
-guns. The selection of a fire position should be preceded by
-careful reconnaissance on the part of the machine-gun commander.
-The following points should be looked for:
-
-(_a_) A good field of fire.
-
-(_b_) Concealment.
-
-(_c_) Cover from the hostile fire.
-
-(_d_) Possibilities for advancing to the position unobserved, and
-facilities for ammunition supply.
-
-(_e_) Security against a covered hostile approach.
-
-If a position affording concealment is not available, one should
-be selected which from the nature of its background will be
-difficult for the enemy to locate. As the opportunities for the
-effective action of machine guns will often be very brief, and as
-the guns will usually be employed singly, the non-commissioned
-officer in charge of each gun will, as a rule, have to act on
-his own initiative in choosing the objective, judging the range,
-and in deciding when to open fire. As a general rule, machine
-guns are best adapted for action at effective ranges; at these it
-is usually possible to distinguish the target, to ascertain its
-range, and to observe the effects of the fire. When, however,
-concealment and protection from fire exist, it may sometimes be
-advisable to bring machine guns into action at decisive range. If
-a sufficiently large target be offered and the range be known, the
-concentration and rapidity of their fire will enable guns to be
-employed, with considerable effect, at long ranges. Machine guns
-should seldom engage artillery at long rifle range, for in such
-circumstances superiority of fire will always rest with the latter
-if the machines are located. Within effective range, however,
-machine guns, if concealed, should inflict considerable loss on
-hostile artillery. Engagements with their lines of skirmishers
-should be avoided, for the risk of disclosing the position of the
-guns and the heavy expenditure of ammunition involved will rarely
-be justified by results. Since the gun is not well adapted for
-keeping up protracted fire, it may be often expedient to withdraw
-it from action, move it elsewhere, or hold it in reserve for a more
-favourable opportunity.
-
-The selection of a target upon which to fire should be governed
-by (_a_) its tactical importance; (_b_) its dimensions and
-vulnerability. It is essential that due regard to economy of
-ammunition should be observed. When, however, it is decided to
-open fire, the ammunition necessary to secure the results sought
-must be expended without hesitation. “Deliberate fire” will rarely
-be resorted to. In cases where a favourable target is offered,
-prolonged “rapid fire” may be employed, but the most suitable
-description of fire will usually be “rapid” in series of from 25 to
-30 rounds.
-
-The range should be taken by a range-finder or ascertained from
-neighbouring infantry or artillery. Ranging by observation of
-fire should be employed only when the nature of the soil is very
-favourable and when no other method is practicable. When a reserve
-ammunition cart is provided for the machine guns it will be under
-the orders of the machine-gun commander, who will arrange that
-it is placed where it can most conveniently supply the guns with
-ammunition; it should be screened from view, and if possible
-sheltered from fire. All belts shall be refilled as soon as
-possible after they are emptied. Should the machine-gun commander
-consider an escort necessary, he will at once bring the fact to the
-notice of his commanding officer.
-
-
-_With Infantry in the Attack_
-
-_Para. 3._--The machine guns will cover the advance of the firing
-line by engaging the enemy from positions in close support of it.
-In ordinary open ground it would rarely be advisable to push them
-into the firing line, where they would offer a conspicuous target
-to the enemy; but in a broken or enclosed country, where the guns
-can be brought up under cover, occasions may arise when they can
-be usefully employed in a forward position. When the ground is
-favourable the gun may with advantage accompany that portion
-of reserves told off to cover the advance of the remainder by
-long-range fire. Machine guns will co-operate with the attacking
-infantry in the decisive fire action in endeavouring to obtain
-a superiority of fire. Positions on the flank of the attacking
-battalions or on commanding ground, if available, should be
-selected, as they admit of the guns remaining in action whilst
-the firing line is pushing forward. A position on the flank of
-the attacking infantry has the further advantages that oblique or
-flanking fire, which from machine guns is particularly effective,
-can be brought to bear against the enemy, whilst guns so placed are
-less likely to draw fire upon the attacking infantry. A change of
-position during the decisive fire action interrupts the fire and
-entails fresh laying and ranging, and therefore should be seldom
-resorted to unless an increased fire effect is to be obtained. At
-the decisive stage of the attack, fire of the greatest intensity
-should be continued as long as is compatible with the safety of
-the advancing firing line. In the event of the attack succeeding,
-the guns should be pushed forward at once in order to pursue the
-retreating enemy with their fire. In the event of failure, every
-effort should be made to cover the retirement of the firing line.
-They will assist in repelling counter-attacks to which the firing
-line may suddenly become exposed, and in the protection of the
-flanks against cavalry or counterstroke. They may be employed to
-give effect to holding attacks or feints, by rapid fire directed
-against successive portions of the enemy’s line; also to make good
-positions secured in the course of an action.
-
-
-_In the Defence_
-
-_Para. 4._--It is more important to shield machine guns from
-artillery fire than to obtain a long range for them. Their
-position, therefore, should be always concealed, and cover from
-fire should be provided. They are best utilised to sweep with
-their fire spaces which are particularly exposed, but which the
-enemy is compelled to cross; to flank salients, cover obstacles,
-deny the passage of roads and defiles, or to guard the flanks of
-the position. It will be at times expedient to retain the guns in
-reserve until the enemy reaches effective ranges. In such cases,
-emplacements should be prepared previously and covered approaches
-provided. Machine guns may also be held as a reserve of fire to
-check the advance of hostile reinforcements, to meet turning
-movements, or to prepare and cover the counter-attack. When their
-retirement is not likely to be compromised, machine guns may be
-utilised in positions in front of the main line to delay the
-enemy’s advance.
-
-
-_In Pursuit and Retreat_
-
-_Para. 5._--In pursuit machine-gun commanders should act with great
-boldness, and it should be their endeavour to come into action
-against the enemy’s flanks at decisive range. In retirements they
-should avoid close engagements, and should take up successive fire
-positions, from which to delay the enemy’s advance and protect the
-flanks of the rear guard.
-
-
-_With Advanced and Rear Guards and with Outposts_
-
-_Para. 6._--With an advanced guard machine guns may often be
-pushed forward to assist in dispersing small bodies of the enemy
-who might delay the advance; they may also be employed in opposing
-the enemy’s advance and in preventing the occupation of important
-positions until the arrival of the main body. With the outposts
-they may be used to sweep the approaches, and to dominate certain
-points which an enemy, in advancing, is likely to pass or to occupy.
-
-
-_With Cavalry_
-
-_Para. 7._--As a general principle machine guns should be employed
-to supplement the fire action of cavalry. During the cavalry
-combat they may be suitably employed in protecting the flanks or
-in directing an oblique fire against the hostile cavalry. When
-the charge is successful they should press forward and engage the
-hostile cavalry at close range. In event of defeat they should form
-rallying points and endeavour to check the enemy’s pursuit. In
-reconnaissance, or other detached duties, the machine guns should
-be retained by the commander of the unit as a reserve, ready to
-move to any point where their presence may be required. They may
-be utilised for such purposes as to induce the enemy to expose his
-position; to drive in hostile patrols; to check the pursuit of
-victorious cavalry; to delay the enemy’s infantry, etc. When their
-fire has achieved its object they should be withdrawn temporarily.
-In other circumstances their action should be guided by the
-principles set forth in the case of infantry.
-
-
-_From_ “FIELD SERVICE REGULATIONS,” _Part I., Operations_, 1909
-
-The machine gun possesses the power of delivering a volume of
-concentrated rifle fire which can be rapidly directed against
-any desired object. Rapid fire cannot be long sustained, owing
-to the expenditure of ammunition involved, and it is therefore
-necessary that the movements and fire action of the weapons should
-be regulated so as to enable them to open fire immediately a
-favourable opportunity arises. Surprise is an important factor in
-the employment of machine guns, which should be concealed, and
-whenever possible provided with cover from fire. The massing of
-machine guns is likely to attract hostile artillery fire. For this
-reason it is usually better to employ them in pairs in support
-of the particular body of troops to which they belong. When an
-overwhelming fire on a particular point is required it can be
-provided by concentrating the fire of dispersed pairs of guns. The
-guns of two or more units may, if required, be placed under the
-command of a specially selected officer and employed as a special
-reserve of fire in the hands of a brigade commander. Machine guns
-are best adapted for use at effective infantry ranges, but when
-good cover from view and fire exists they may be usefully employed
-at close infantry ranges.[62]
-
-
-_With Outposts_
-
-Machine guns with outposts may be employed to sweep approaches, and
-to cover ground which an enemy in advancing may be compelled to
-pass or occupy.[63]
-
-
-_During the Battle_
-
-Machine guns will be especially valuable in bringing a sudden fire
-to bear from such positions, both in order to cover a further
-advance and to assist in defeating counter-attacks. Machine guns
-can normally support an attack most efficiently from well-concealed
-positions provided with good cover, and within effective infantry
-range of the enemy. Occasionally, when good opportunities for a
-concealed advance present themselves, they may be established
-within close infantry range of the objective.[64]
-
-
-_From_ “CAVALRY TRAINING,” 1907
-
-Machine guns afford a means of developing fire without dismounting
-men from the squadrons. During the cavalry fight they will usually
-be massed under one commander, but may be employed in pairs when
-necessary. They will co-operate with the horse artillery, the
-great volume of fire which they are able to bring to bear from a
-narrow front being particularly effective. Their presence with the
-artillery will often admit of the latter dispensing with any other
-escort.[65]
-
-
-_Position of Machine Guns_
-
-During the approach march the machine guns will usually accompany
-the artillery, to whom they may act as escort when necessary.[66]
-
-
-_From_ “INFANTRY TRAINING, 1908” (AMENDMENT, AUGUST, 1909)
-
-
-_General Characteristics_
-
-1. The machine gun possesses the power of delivering rapidly from
-a narrow front a volume of closely concentrated fire which can be
-controlled easily, be turned readily in any desired direction, or
-be distributed by traversing.
-
-2. The effective range of machine guns is the same as that of the
-rifle; they are therefore not suited for employment in place of
-artillery. On the other hand, the effect of machine-gun fire at
-effective infantry and close infantry ranges is very great, and
-at close infantry ranges it may, with favourable conditions, be
-annihilating. Machine guns are very suitable for the development of
-covering fire within the limits of effective rifle range. They can
-accompany the troops to which they may be attached over any country.
-
-3. The action of the mechanism is liable to temporary interruption
-by jams. Machine guns should not therefore be used singly under
-normal conditions. They are organised in sections of two guns,
-which should rarely be broken up.
-
-4. Machine guns are essentially weapons of opportunity. The
-expenditure of ammunition involved and the nature of the mechanism
-make long periods of rapid fire unsuitable. The power of the gun is
-best used to develop unexpected bursts of fire.
-
-
-_The Organisation and Training of Infantry Machine-Gun Sections_
-
-1. The strength and composition of a machine-gun section are shown
-in War Establishments. An infantry machine-gun section is an
-integral portion of an infantry battalion, but two or more sections
-may be brought together by the brigade commander and used under the
-command of a brigade machine-gun officer.
-
-The two non-commissioned officers and twelve privates shown in the
-establishment will be trained as first-class machine gunners.
-Two non-commissioned officers and twelve men will be trained, as
-opportunity offers, as second-class machine gunners to replace
-casualties among first-class machine gunners.
-
-2. A subaltern officer, other than the assistant adjutant, will be
-selected in each battalion to command and train the machine-gun
-section, under the orders of the commanding officer. Should a
-brigade commander desire to train the machine guns of his brigade
-to act together when massed, an officer, who is not the machine-gun
-officer of one of the battalions of the brigade, may be selected to
-supervise the firing practice and to conduct the brigade training
-of machine-gun sections.
-
-3. Officers, non-commissioned officers, and men detailed for
-machine-gun training should be changed as little as possible; the
-two non-commissioned officers and twelve men trained as first-class
-machine gunners will fire the practices prescribed in the Musketry
-Regulations with one of the companies of the battalion,[67] but
-will at other times be at the disposal of the machine-gun officer
-for instruction.
-
-4. Details as to the mechanism of the gun, and the drill of
-machine-gun sections are contained in the handbook of the gun.
-Instructions as to the course of firing are contained in the
-Musketry Regulations.
-
-5. The preliminary training, which may be carried out in the
-neighbourhood of barracks, will consist in instruction in the
-mechanism of the gun; in the drill and methods of laying, ranging,
-and firing; in packing and unpacking with limbered wagons.
-
-6. As soon as the men of a section are thoroughly conversant with
-the mechanism, are able to recognise without delay the cause of
-any failure and to remedy it at once, and can drill and handle the
-gun with precision, their further training will be carried out in
-open country away from barracks. During this training the sections
-should be practised in bringing the gun into action; in fire
-discipline; in fire control; in laying and ranging in every variety
-of country; in utilising natural cover when advancing into action;
-and in constructing cover from both view and fire. The men should
-also be trained in range-finding, judging distance, and in the use
-of field-glasses.
-
-7. When the section is proficient in these branches of training,
-the commanding officer will arrange for it to be trained with one
-or more companies which have reached the more advanced stages of
-company training, in order that it may be practised in co-operating
-with other troops and in dealing with such situations as would
-confront it in war. The periods of preliminary training should
-be arranged so that the section may be ready for this training,
-without hurrying through the more elementary work. To enable this
-to be done it will usually be necessary to begin the preliminary
-training during the winter training season.
-
-
-_General Principles of the Employment of Infantry Machine Guns_
-
-1. The normal duty of the infantry machine gun in war is to
-assist infantry in every way by its fire, but it may be given an
-independent rôle at any time, if the tactical situation makes it
-advisable to do so.
-
-2. The effective use of a machine gun depends largely upon the
-skill with which it has been brought into action. Surprise and
-concealment are very important factors in its employment; for the
-effect of the gun is much increased by sudden bursts of fire from
-concealed positions. The tripod mounting makes it possible to take
-advantage of small features of the ground to obtain cover and to
-escape an enemy’s observation. In order to develop the power of the
-gun to the utmost the fullest use should be made of natural and
-artificial cover.
-
-3. The depth of the beaten zone of the machine gun is small as
-compared with that of collective rifle fire. This makes the effect
-of small errors in sighting for elevation proportionately greater.
-A section of machine guns cannot therefore be relied upon to make
-its fire effective when first opening fire, at distances beyond
-about 1,000 yards. If observation of fire is possible, elevation
-may be rapidly corrected, and the fire of the two guns may in
-that case be very effective up to 2,000 yards, or up to the limit
-of observation. If there is no observation it will be necessary to
-employ several guns and expend a large quantity of ammunition in
-order to obtain adequate assurance of effect beyond about 1,000
-yards.
-
-4. By massing the machine guns of a brigade the assurance of fire
-effect at ranges beyond 1,000 yards is increased, and it is easier
-to control and direct fire. At shorter ranges massed machine guns
-may form a conspicuous target, and the control of more than two
-guns then becomes difficult. Occasions will, however, often arise
-when the massed guns of a brigade can be brought into action in a
-well-concealed position within the limits of effective rifle range.
-Under such circumstances massed guns may produce great effect both
-in attack and defence.
-
-5. The general considerations which govern the selection of a
-target for machine guns are--its tactical importance, its range,
-and its vulnerability.
-
-Machine guns should seldom engage artillery with direct fire beyond
-effective rifle range, for in such circumstances superiority of
-fire will always rest with the artillery if the machine guns are
-located. Within effective range machine guns, if concealed, should
-inflict considerable loss on artillery, while oblique fire may be
-usefully employed up to the limits of long rifle range.
-
-Engagements with thin lines of skirmishers should be avoided
-unless the range is accurately known, as the risk of disclosing the
-position of the gun and the expenditure of ammunition involved will
-rarely be justified by results.
-
-6. It is very important that fire should not be opened until
-there is a reasonable probability of obtaining the desired
-result. A section commander must have a thorough knowledge of
-the capabilities of his guns to enable him to decide when he is
-justified in opening fire.
-
-7. Machine guns should as a rule only open fire upon targets which
-are sufficiently large and dense to promise an adequate return
-for the ammunition expended. Special circumstances may, however,
-warrant the opening of fire upon less favourable targets. When a
-machine-gun commander has decided to open fire, the ammunition
-necessary to secure the results sought should be expended without
-hesitation.
-
-8. If there is no satisfactory indication of effect, and no special
-justification for firing at long range exists, it will usually
-be better to withdraw from action and to await opportunities for
-effective intervention.
-
-9. A machine-gun commander should be given definite orders as
-to his action, but should be allowed full liberty, within the
-limits assigned to the commander of the body of troops with whom
-he is co-operating, in carrying out his orders. He should be kept
-informed of all changes and developments of the situation which may
-affect his action. Initiative and enterprise are essential to the
-effective handling of machine guns.
-
-10. Machine guns will usually be sufficiently protected by the
-dispositions of the troops with whom they are acting. Should a
-machine-gun commander find himself in an exposed position, he
-should consult the nearest infantry commander, who is responsible
-for providing a suitable escort, if in his opinion one is necessary.
-
-11. When a machine gun is in action only those numbers required to
-work the gun should be with it. Spare numbers, when not employed as
-range-finders, ground scouts, ammunition-carriers, or on similar
-duties, should be in covered positions in the vicinity. Groups of
-men close to machine guns do not facilitate the working of the gun,
-and make a vulnerable target.
-
-The limbered wagons will be unloaded in positions where they are
-screened from the enemy’s fire and observation.
-
-The commander of the machine-gun section will select a covered
-position for his small-arm ammunition cart, as close to his guns as
-possible. (see Section 174).
-
-
-_Choice of Fire Positions_
-
-1. Reconnaissance is of special importance in the handling of
-machine guns. Before bringing his guns into action the brigade
-machine-gun officer if the machine guns are brigaded, or the
-battalion machine-gun officer if the sections are working
-independently, accompanied by range-takers and orderlies, should
-usually be well in advance of his guns, where he can observe the
-action of the body of infantry with which he is co-operating. He
-should carefully reconnoitre suitable fire positions and make all
-preparations for bringing his guns rapidly into action. During
-this reconnaissance the machine guns should normally be placed
-in concealed positions. In any case they should not follow the
-machine-gun commander so closely as to expose their movements.
-Alternative positions to which the guns may be moved to meet
-changes in the situation or to avoid artillery fire should always
-be prepared.
-
-2. The choice of a fire position must depend upon the tactical
-requirements of the situation, and upon the object in view; for
-example, it must depend upon whether it is desired to use covering
-enfilade or flanking fire, or to act by surprise.
-
-A commanding position is favourable for the development of covering
-fire, while for other purposes the gun should be sited as low as is
-compatible with obtaining the necessary field of fire.
-
-3. A clear field of fire, facilities for observation, a covered
-approach, concealment and cover for the guns and their detachments,
-and facilities for ammunition supply are advantages to be looked
-for in a good fire position, but one position will rarely unite
-them all. In arranging for the concealment of the guns it is
-important to consider the background. The neighbourhood of
-landmarks and the tops of prominent features should be avoided.
-
-4. Their power of all-round traversing and their great effect
-against deep targets make machine guns specially suitable for
-position on a flank, whence they can bring enfilade fire to bear. A
-position in the firing line is rarely suitable, as the fire of the
-guns may be masked and the enemy’s fire drawn on the firing line.
-
-5. The interval between guns in action should be as large as is
-compatible with effective control, but the front occupied by the
-massed guns of a brigade should rarely exceed 150 yards.
-
-
-_Machine Guns in Attack_
-
-1. Since machine guns are unsuited for maintaining a continuous
-fire, they will usually best assist the infantry by withholding
-their fire during the earlier stages of the battle, so as to be
-able to intervene at more critical periods. Machine guns allotted
-to a protective detachment will, however, always be employed so as
-best to assist the detachment in its special duties (_Field Service
-Regulations_, Part I., Chap. V.).
-
-2. It will depend upon the general situation whether the machine
-guns should be placed under the control of the brigade machine-gun
-officer or left with the battalions to which they belong. When
-the facilities for concealment and control at effective range are
-good, and the brigade is engaged in a decisive attack, the best
-results will usually be obtained by unity of command. By a timely
-concentration of fire machine guns may thus be the deciding factor
-in the struggle for superiority of fire.
-
-When control is difficult, or when the brigade is extended over
-a wide front, it will usually be better to leave guns with their
-units.
-
-3. It will often be advisable to employ both methods and to leave
-their machine guns with the battalions which are first extended,
-while those of reserve battalions are placed under the command of
-the brigade machine-gun officer.
-
-4. Although machine guns can move with deployed infantry under
-fire, they should rarely attempt to keep pace with attacking
-infantry. When they have gained a position from which they can
-effectively support their infantry in the struggle for fire
-superiority and in the assault, they should only be moved for
-good and sufficient reasons. The difficulties of ranging and
-of concealment on the move usually outweigh the advantages of
-decreasing the range.
-
-5. Machine guns will usually find opportunities for employment
-in the attack in assisting the advance of their infantry by
-means of covering fire; in protecting attacking infantry against
-counter-attack or against cavalry; in assisting the infantry in the
-fire fight, and in preparing for the assault by sudden bursts of
-converging fire against the objective of the attack. They will also
-be of value in securing localities which have been seized during
-the advance, and can assist local reserves in acting as points of
-support to the attack.
-
-
-_Machine Guns in Defence_
-
-1. In defence, as in attack, the fire of machine guns should
-usually be withheld until the more critical stages of the battle.
-Premature opening of fire is liable to expose the position of the
-machine guns to the enemy’s artillery.
-
-2. Machine guns may either be dispersed to command approaches,
-defiles, exits from woods, etc., by which the enemy may advance,
-to occupy advanced posts, and to bring enfilade fire to bear
-upon salients and upon the ground in front of weak parts of the
-position, or they may be massed and employed under the orders of
-commanders of sections.
-
-3. When the guns are massed the alternative positions, Sec.
-167 (D) 1, should be such that the firing line can be assisted
-during the crisis of the fight, and the advance of local and
-decisive counter-attacks can be covered and prepared. When covered
-approaches can be provided, massed machine guns should usually be
-withdrawn, after they have achieved their immediate object, and
-should await another favourable opportunity for action.
-
-
-ITALY
-
-GUN.--The Perino machine gun has been adopted. The barrel is
-surrounded by a cooling tube containing water, and the gun fires
-the same cartridge as the infantry rifle. It is regulated to fire
-425 rounds a minute, and has a maximum rate of 500 rounds. It can
-be fired continuously with the automatic action, or intermittently.
-It is loaded by a ridged metal clip containing 25 cartridges, 10
-of which clips are formed into a magazine. It is claimed that this
-clip is superior to the belt on account of the ease with which
-it can be recharged. The gun weighs 27 kilograms, which will be
-reduced to 23 in future manufacture. It is mounted on a provisional
-tripod, which is of a good pattern, but is said to be too heavy,
-and the weight is to be reduced to 20 kilograms.
-
-The gun can be fired from any height above the ground by moving the
-legs of the tripod.
-
-The mechanism is strong and simple, the range is the same as the
-rifle, and it is very accurate at all ranges.
-
-The Perino machine gun was adopted on the recommendation of a
-Commission, who tested it against the Maxim and reported it to be
-more efficient.
-
-They recommended the following organisation:
-
-ORGANISATION.--Four machine guns are attached to each regiment of
-cavalry and infantry, and two guns to each Alpine battalion. The
-detachments recommended are:
-
-For cavalry: 1 N.C.O., 5 men, 7 horses, per gun.
-
-For infantry: 1 N.C.O., 4 men, 2 mules, per gun.
-
-_Ammunition._--No details have been settled as to the amount or
-method of carrying.
-
-TACTICAL.--No official instructions for the tactical handling of
-machine guns have yet been issued.
-
-
-JAPAN
-
-GUN.--The Japanese have adopted the Hotchkiss,[68] the barrel of
-which is air-cooled, having seven radiating gills on the breech to
-absorb the heat. The bore is ·256, being the same as the rifle;
-the weight is 70 lb. It is regulated to fire at a maximum rate of
-600 rounds a minute. It is loaded by brass clips containing 30
-cartridges inserted into the left side of the gun. The empties are
-ejected on the right side. The gun is sighted up to 2,187 yards,
-with a tangent sight, and is mounted on a tripod weighing 40 lb.,
-which has an all-round traverse, and can be adjusted to fire from
-two heights. Shields were used in the late war, but were discarded
-on account of the weight. It is probable that detachable shields,
-large enough to cover the detachment, will in future be issued with
-machine guns for use as the situation requires.
-
-[Illustration: DIAGRAM VI
-
-_Diagram of Japanese Machine Gun--Tripod Mount._
-
- _a-b Front and Rear Sights._
- _A Piston rod._
- _m Gas Vent._
- _e Gas chamber._
- _d Regulating nut._
- _e Strong spiral spring._
- _s Feed Slot._
- _R Radiator._]
-
-The Japanese machine gun is of home design and manufacture, and
-belongs to that class in which the mechanism is actuated by the
-action of gas pressure operating upon a plunger or piston and not
-by the direct force of recoil as in the Maxim. It uses the same
-ammunition as the infantry rifle (murata calibre ·256), and is
-rated as firing 600 rounds a minute. Two forms of mountings are
-employed, the tripod and the wheeled; the former for fortress use,
-and the latter for mobile troops. Referring to the plate, a gas
-vent _m_ communicates with a gas chamber _c_ attached laterally to
-the barrel. The pressure in the gas chamber is regulated, within
-limits, by the nut _d_, which varies the capacity of the chamber.
-The piston-rod _A_ is acted upon by the gas pressure at its forward
-end, and is driven to the rear against a strong spiral spring _o_,
-which moves the piston end forward after the gas pressure has
-ceased to act. The reciprocating motion of the piston-rod actuates
-the mechanism, which is entirely enclosed in the housing, and
-performs the various operations of feeding, firing, and ejecting
-through a suitable train of gearing. Cooling is effected by the
-radiator _R_, a circumferentially grooved mass of metal attached to
-the barrel. The cartridges are mounted on a strip of sheet brass
-from which clips are punched and bent round the cartridges to hold
-them in position. A series of holes along the edges of the brass
-strip engage the teeth of pinions which feed the strip forward as
-the piston _A_ moves backward and forward. The cartridges are fired
-from their clips by fingers, and drop into position when the bolt
-is withdrawn. Thirty cartridges are mounted on one strip, which
-is fed into the slot _s_, from the left side. The trigger must
-be kept down by pressure all the time, otherwise the spring _o_
-cannot operate to return the block forward. The gun is provided
-with a shoulder piece and gunner’s seat, as shown. The gun alone
-weighs about 73 lb., and with tripod 115 lb. It is sighted to 2,000
-metres. The gun is stated to work very satisfactorily, and, owing
-to the positive motions, jamming does not occur easily.
-
-ORGANISATION.--At the close of the war each of the two cavalry
-brigades was equipped with 6 machine guns and each infantry
-regiment with 3 guns, and it was contemplated to increase the
-allowance to 6 guns for each regiment, infantry or cavalry. The
-guns are served by infantrymen who are extra-regimental and
-selected from men having mechanical knowledge.
-
-Guns are organised as follows:
-
-_Infantry._--Batteries of 6 guns, each subdivided into 3 sections;
-each infantry regiment has one battery attached to it.
-
-The personnel of the battery consists of 1 captain (or lieutenant),
-1 W.O., 1 bugler.
-
-Each gun has 1 commander (sergeant or corporal), 1 firer, 1 loader,
-3 ammunition carriers.
-
-TACTICAL.--Tactically, the guns are used primarily for defence,
-and reserve their fire for short ranges up to 600 or 800 metres.
-On the defensive line of the Third Army after the battle of Mukden
-many machine-gun emplacements were noted. These consisted mainly of
-blinded casemates, 8 ft. wide, 10 ft. deep, and 3 ft. 6 in. high,
-and from 18 to 24 in. of overhead cover. Importance is attached to
-concealing the guns, and it was claimed that none had been knocked
-out by Russian artillery. In the cavalry brigades the machine guns
-were organised into sections of 2 guns under an officer, so that
-sections could be detached with squadrons.
-
-In the First Cavalry Brigade, General Akiyama, 4,000 rounds per
-gun per day was the greatest rate of fire attained. Machine guns
-were popular in the Japanese army, and were highly spoken of by the
-officers.[69]
-
-_Cavalry._--Each cavalry brigade has an 8-gun battery, which
-is divided into half batteries of 4 guns each. The personnel
-of the battery consists of 1 captain, 2 subalterns, 1 W.O.
-(sergeant-major), 2 N.C.O.’s, 2 trumpeters. The gun detachments are
-the same as for infantry, with 3 mounted men per gun in addition.
-
-TRANSPORT. _Infantry._--30 horses, 6 of which carry guns and
-tripods, and 24 carry the ammunition. One ammunition horse follows
-each gun, and the remaining 18 under the W.O. form the battery
-ammunition column. Each ammunition horse with the guns carries
-15,000 rounds in two boxes, and each horse with the ammunition
-column 2,160 rounds in four boxes.
-
-_Cavalry._--Guns and tripods are carried on horses with 32
-ammunition horses, each carrying 2,400 rounds.
-
-Total establishment: 3 officers; 87 rank and file.
-
-NOTE.--The organisation during the war was as follows:
-
-Each cavalry brigade had a battery of 6 guns (Hotchkiss pattern
-made in Japan). These were mounted on a heavy limbered carriage
-with pole draught and 4 horses; these carriages were clumsy, heavy,
-and conspicuous, and weighed 15 hundredweight. There was a fixed
-shield on each carriage and a rough tripod was also carried.
-
-
-_Tactical_
-
-The Japanese have issued a well-illustrated drill book for the
-use of machine-gun batteries, with cavalry and with infantry
-respectively, with a view to enable them to manœuvre accurately and
-easily in all situations. Their tactics are at present (1909) under
-revision, and it is understood that there are likely to be many
-changes introduced owing to the lessons of the late war.
-
-The following is the most recent summary of the principles of their
-tactics:
-
-Machine guns are used as batteries, but may be broken up into
-sections or even single guns. It is thought wrong to employ
-“slow” fire, and 800 yards is considered the most useful range.
-Well-hidden lines of skirmishers and other machine guns are
-unsuitable targets, and they are never to be used to replace
-artillery or to fire at artillery at long range, though they may do
-so at close range or from the flanks or rear. Concealed positions
-are recommended, and the use of alternative positions advocated,
-and change of position should be made on the initiative of the
-commander. Wide intervals between the guns should be used, but the
-battery front should not exceed 110 yards. The guns should be used
-on the flanks or rear of the enemy when possible. All ranges should
-be measured.
-
-Machine guns should be used in the attack just before the final
-assault, and in the defence when repelling the assault or to
-reinforce a threatened flank. In both attack and defence they are
-to be held back, and fire reserved for the crisis of the action.
-
-Use with the advance guard is not desirable as a rule. It is
-strongly advocated with a rear guard, owing to their intense fire,
-rapidity in ceasing fire (breaking off action), and mobility.
-The officer commanding machine guns must be accurately acquainted
-with the plans of the G.O.C., but must act on his own initiative
-in forwarding the general scheme according to the situation.
-Communication with the G.O.C. is considered vital. The guns are
-considered especially valuable in covering the retreat of infantry.
-Concealment from the enemy while manœuvring and surprise by sudden
-fire are considered essential to their success.
-
-
-_Regulations with the Infantry, 1907_
-
-_Art. 67._--In the offensive the battery is at first kept in
-reserve; but when its intervention becomes necessary during the
-general engagement, to prepare the assault on a point in the
-enemy’s position, they will be given orders to come into action.
-
-The employment of machine guns is especially advantageous to
-prepare an infantry attack. They can co-operate with this attack
-even under heavy fire, without, however, being obliged to follow
-the infantry. The battery ought often to change its position,
-at the discretion of its commander, to lend its support to the
-infantry. The battery will, if possible, take up a dominating
-position or will establish itself on a flank in order to open fire
-on the selected point of attack, in such a way as not to be marked
-by its own infantry.
-
-_Art. 69._--In the offensive in case of success: The machine guns
-will rapidly and boldly move to a favourable position to pursue
-the enemy with their fire and to make their infantry powerless to
-attempt a counter-attack. The energetic action of the machine guns
-after the position has been carried will force the enemy to scatter.
-
-_Art. 70._--In the offensive in case of failures: The machine guns
-will sacrifice themselves, if necessary, to cover their infantry.
-They will break down the morale of hostile troops by riddling
-them with fire without care for their own losses, and will thus
-facilitate the retreat of their own infantry.[70]
-
-
-_Machine Guns in the late War_
-
-All officers are enthusiastic about machine guns. All agree that
-their chief rôle is defence, even at night, and they are extremely
-useful in attack. During the battle of Mukden machine guns were
-used very much in the attack by the Japanese, but it seems that the
-casualties of the machine-gun detachments were very heavy indeed;
-one commander thought them especially useful in pursuit.[71]
-
-
-_Remarks by Lt.-Gen. Sir C. J. Burnett, K.C.B._
-
-The value of machine guns is fully recognised. I had a long
-conversation with the brigade machine-gun officer. He has six
-machine guns formed as a separate detachment, extra-regimental,
-and attached to the brigade. Two guns under an officer form the
-subdivision of his command, and can be detached at will, but no
-machine gun is ever employed singly. The guns are usually kept
-at the disposal of the brigadier, and have been used more in
-defence than attack; they seldom open at long ranges unless on an
-exceptionally good target. It is rather the rule to reserve the
-machine-gun fire for decisive ranges. In many actions which cavalry
-officers described to me, the practice has been to allow the enemy
-to come within 600 yards before opening fire, and then suddenly
-to overwhelm him. The principle with such well-trained troops is
-sound, for the morale “knock-out” of a 10-per-cent. loss suffered
-in a few minutes is far greater than a similar loss spread over the
-advance from 1,000 to 600 yards, and the expenditure of ammunition
-is less. Concealment is an essential feature of the Japanese
-machine-gun tactics, and the officer told me he had not a single
-gun put out of action by opposing artillery. The guns have shields;
-the manipulators of the machine guns are very expert, and there is
-now seldom a jam. Like a good _chauffeur_, the Japanese machine
-gunner knows all the peculiarities of the weapon he fires, and can
-almost tell by instinct when anything is going wrong. Four thousand
-rounds is the most that has been fired in a day by three machine
-guns of the 1st Cavalry Brigade; the number is now increased to
-six. Throughout the Japanese Army the machine guns introduced
-during the war are very popular, and instead of three per regiment,
-six per regiment are being provided.
-
-
-_Report by U.S.A. Officers on Russo-Japanese War_
-
-These guns were highly thought of in the Japanese Army, and the
-propriety of attaching them to the infantry was never questioned.
-Four or six guns per battery and one battery per regiment were
-usually suggested, although good arguments have been heard for
-eight guns in a battery, and the wish for twelve was sometimes
-expressed.... On the outbreak of war the Japanese expected
-largely to limit the use of the machine gun to the defensive,
-but experience soon taught them to widen its field, and later it
-was used to great advantage on the offensive. Their rapid fire
-frequently silenced the fire of the Russian infantry, and caused
-the latter to crouch down in their trenches. When the guns stopped
-firing the Russians could be seen again popping their heads above
-the parapet. If the flanks of a line be weak, these weapons can be
-used advantageously to strengthen them. Six guns were generally
-recommended for a battery, thus permitting an assignment of two
-per battalion. One officer of high rank, however, who was heard
-to discuss this question ably, said he preferred eight guns, and
-that he would divide these into two equal sections and assign
-each section to a battalion, thus leaving the third battalion
-without any. His idea was to use these guns both on the offensive
-and defensive. On the offensive he would send them forward among
-the first lines of the battalion to which they were attached,
-or reinforce these lines by the guns at an early stage of the
-action. In this way he would use them as a substitute for infantry
-reinforcements. This system will enable the regimental commander to
-hold the third battalion much longer intact for a decisive effort
-when an opportunity offers. Officers who have had experience with
-machine guns were opposed to using them singly, saying that never
-less than two should be at any position not only to obtain volume
-of fire, but also because a gun can so easily be put out of action.
-In order to reduce the losses among the men from shrapnel fire to
-a minimum, they recommend that the guns in a platoon be separated
-by 20 metres and the platoons by 100 to 200 metres. Artillery
-fire is looked upon as the most dangerous foe of the machine gun,
-and in fact the most effective use of the latter on the offensive
-presupposes the enemy’s artillery has been silenced, or at least
-that its attention is well occupied by friendly batteries. The
-machine gun is believed to be especially useful in mountainous
-districts, where the elevated ground often discloses the close
-formation of the enemy. The Japanese frequently fired it from an
-elevated position over the heads of their infantry, and in this
-way, as their battalions advanced, they at times kept down the fire
-from the Russian trenches.
-
-An officer who commanded one of these batteries at the battle of
-Mukden, and who later was detailed to lecture to the attachés with
-the First Army, said that on one occasion there he continued this
-fire until the advancing infantry had arrived within 30 metres
-of the enemy’s position. It is claimed the fire should almost
-invariably be directed against the opposing infantry. The gun is
-comparatively heavy, and when in action the battery is advancing
-with the infantry it is sometimes difficult to keep up with the
-latter, and moreover the men carrying the gun offer a good target;
-and for these reasons the guns should frequently remain in position
-as the echelons make their rushes, provided cover is provided
-and a free field of fire secured. It is not essential that they
-should be at all times immediately on the line occupied by the
-infantry, although when the latter, after a considerable advance,
-meets with determined opposition, some guns should be brought up.
-This will give a feeling of confidence, and if need be help to
-check a counter-attack. When advancing under fire, it is often a
-good plan to move one gun at a time. Battery commanders report
-good results when firing at long ranges--that is, between 1,200
-and 1,800 metres. One thousand five hundred shots per gun is the
-greatest number I heard of being fired in one hour. These guns were
-sometimes attached to outposts. The loss among men serving machine
-guns is usually great, and this requires that a large number be
-trained in each regiment to use them. One officer of experience
-with these weapons thought all officers and men selected to work
-with them should be trained at division headquarters, or at some
-other central point, in order to secure uniformity of instruction
-and service.
-
-On a previous occasion I reported that the shield was not generally
-desired. I wish to modify this statement, as further investigation
-showed that while different views were entertained on this subject,
-the consensus of opinion was favourable to the retention of the
-shield. The objections to it are that it offers a good target
-and is more or less difficult to handle on the offensive. Some
-officers were in favour of using it on the defensive, but not on
-the offensive. In general, however, it was thought that both on the
-offensive and defensive it gives material cover and adds confidence
-and composure. The guns were almost invariably transported on
-pack-ponies, except, of course, when effecting changes of position
-under heavy fire, when they were carried by hand. It is understood
-wheels were occasionally used in some parts of the army, but I
-never saw the guns transported that way....
-
-Machine guns were also added to the cavalry after the outbreak of
-the war, there being six to each brigade, divided into sections of
-two guns under one officer. Sections may be attached to squadrons
-as required. The guns are used primarily for defence, and their
-fire reserved for short and mid ranges....
-
-Machine guns played an important part in the siege of Port
-Arthur, being freely used by both sides. The Japanese gun was a
-single-barrelled gun of home manufacture, while the Russians used
-mainly the Maxim automatic. The Russian guns were used with telling
-effect against the Japanese in the numerous bloody assaults, being
-trained to cover all the approaches with a murderous fire.
-
-
-PORTUGAL
-
-On mobilisation machine-gun foot batteries are formed, the
-personnel being provided from the division to which the batteries
-are subsequently attached. Each battery consists of 6 guns, and is
-commanded by a captain. It is subdivided into 3 sections of 2 guns
-each, commanded by a subaltern.
-
-The gun is provided with a shield and has a tripod mounting, the
-whole being carried on a wheeled carriage on the march. When coming
-into action the gun and tripod are taken out of the carriage and
-carried into position by 4 men.
-
-The weight of the gun, tripod, and shield, amounting to about 175
-lb., is unevenly distributed and renders rapid marching impossible,
-as it must be carried as one piece owing to the complicated
-attachment of gun and tripod.
-
-The tripod is heavy and rather high, making the gun conspicuous in
-action, and on steep slopes the mounting is unstable.
-
-The elevating and traversing gear do not give sufficient scope.
-
-The cartridge belt contains 250 rounds. Each section (2 guns) has
-an ammunition wagon carrying 14,000 rounds for each gun.
-
-
-RUSSIA
-
-GUNS.--Rexar and Maxim, but the former are being discarded and
-Maxims alone will be used in future. They are sighted up to 2,000
-yards.
-
-ORGANISATION.--Each regiment (4 battalions) has 4 machine guns, and
-it is intended to increase this to 8 in the future.
-
-The detail of the personnel to each battery of 4 guns is as
-follows: 2 officers, 50 N.C.O.’s and men, and 35 horses if the guns
-are on wheeled carriages (36 horses if the guns are carried on
-pack-horses).
-
-The detachment is armed with the carbine.
-
-For each gun 13 belts of ammunition are carried, each belt
-containing 450 rounds.
-
-The weight of the gun is 68 lb., and of the tripod 45 lb.; the
-total weight carried by the pack-horse being 198 lb.
-
-
-SPAIN
-
-has 6 groups of Maxim and Hotchkiss guns, which have been recently
-subdivided into 2 sections. Two new sections were raised in
-September 1908.
-
-The 14 sections are attached to the infantry brigades.
-
-Pack transport has been adopted.
-
-
-SWITZERLAND
-
-There are 4 companies, each having 8 guns, which are subdivided
-into sections of 2 guns each.
-
-The detachments are mounted and the guns are allotted to the
-cavalry.
-
-The Maxim is the gun adopted by the Swiss Army, and in the
-Regulations three kinds of machine-gun fire are recognised, viz.:
-
-(1) _Salvoes, for range-finding._--The 2 guns of a section fire
-short salvoes of 20 to 25 rounds alternately to get the right range.
-
-(2) _Quick fire._--This is the normal method, and consists in
-firing about 100 rounds at a time.
-
-(3) _Rapid fire by individual guns._--Each gun fires as rapidly
-as possible; used only as a last resort, or against a specially
-favourable target.
-
-The section (2 guns) is regarded as the unit, and the spirit of the
-Regulations is that the machine guns are particularly for use with
-cavalry, and must possess to the full the mobility and dash of that
-arm.
-
-Dismounted action for the cavalry is not favourably regarded, and
-the machine guns are expected to relieve the cavalry of this duty.
-
-
-
-
- PRINTED BY
- HAZELL, WATSON AND VINEY, LD.
- LONDON AND AYLESBURY.
-
-
-[Illustration: A MAP SHEWING
-
-the approximate allotment of Machine Guns for the
-
-DEFENCE OF PORT ARTHUR]
-
-
-FOOTNOTES:
-
-[1] Lieutenant A. E. Phillips, in the _Journal U.S.A. Cavalry
-Association_, July 1909.
-
-[2] The Germans consider its fire value equal to 120 rifles.
-
-[3] Balck’s _Modern European Tactics_.
-
-[4] These are still in use in the Territorial Army.
-
-[5] _Journal of U.S.A. Cavalry Association_, July 1909.
-
-[6] United States Official Report of Russo-Japanese War.
-
-[7] See pages 12 and 13.
-
-[8] See Chap. VII., “Cavalry Training.”
-
-[9] _Cavalry Training_, 1907, p. 226.
-
-[10] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I.
-
-[11] _Cavalry Training_, 1907.
-
-[12] _France Militaire_, April 15th, 1905.
-
-[13] _Cavalry Training_, 1907, p. 218.
-
-[14] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I. chap. vii. p. 133.
-
-[15] _Cavalry Training_, 1907, chap. vii. p. 229.
-
-[16] Captain F. Culmann in _R.U.S.I. Journal_, August, 1909.
-
-[17] _Infantry Training_, 1905, p. 116.
-
-[18] The Austrian regulations say 1,000 yards.
-
-[19] Captain von Beckmann.
-
-[20] _Times History of the War in South Africa._
-
-[21] A Japanese machine gun fired 25,000 rounds in one day in
-Manchuria.--AUTHOR.
-
-[22] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I. p. 119.
-
-[23] _Mitrailleuses à l’Etranger_, par Lieut. M.
-
-[24] _The Great Siege_, by W. Norregaard.
-
-[25] Captain Niessel in _Enseignements techniques de la guerre
-Russo-Japonaise_.
-
-[26] Captain von Beckmann.
-
-[27] Von Ullrich.
-
-[28] _The Great Siege_, by W. Norregaard.
-
-[29] Von Ullrich, War Correspondent of _Gazette de Cologne_.
-
-[30] British Officer’s Report, Russo-Japanese War.
-
-[31] _Ibid._
-
-[32] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909, p. 83.
-
-[33] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909, p. 83.
-
-[34] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909, p. 85.
-
-[35] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909, p. 84.
-
-[36] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909, p. 86.
-
-[37] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909, pp. 87-9.
-
-[38] Between 400 and 500 is the usual rate of fire.--AUTHOR.
-
-[39] See _Handbook for ·303 Machine Guns_, pp. 88-9.
-
-[40] See map; the Japanese name for this work is Ban-ru-san Nishi
-Hodai.
-
-[41] See _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909, p. 153.
-
-[42] _The Great Siege_, by W. Norregaard.
-
-[43] _Ibid._
-
-[44] _The Great Siege_, by W. Norregaard.
-
-[45] Von Ullrich.
-
-[46] _The Great Siege_, by W. Norregaard.
-
-[47] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909, p. 140.
-
-[48] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., p. 141.
-
-[49] A great many machine guns were added to the forts from the
-fleet early in June.--AUTHOR.
-
-[50] _Small Wars, their Principles and Practice._
-
-[51] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909.
-
-[52] _Small Wars, their Principles and Practice_, p. 441.
-
-[53] Official Report.
-
-[54] Official History of operations in Somaliland.
-
-[55] Major Gough’s Official Report.
-
-[56] Official History of the operations in Somaliland.
-
-[57] From Staff Diary of 1st Brigade.
-
-[58] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909, p. 173.
-
-[59] Callwell’s _Small Wars, their Principles and Practice_.
-
-[60] _Field Service Regulations_, Part I., 1909, Sect. 157.
-
-[61] This system was adopted; see paragraph _re_ Organisation, p.
-189.
-
-[62] Section 7.
-
-[63] Section 77, Para. 4.
-
-[64] Section 150, Para. 5.
-
-[65] Section 150, Para. (iv).
-
-[66] Section 149, Para. (v).
-
-[67] They should fire with their own companies if it can be
-arranged that they complete the various parts of the range practice
-on approximately the same date.
-
-[68] The Hotchkiss loses accuracy after 600 rounds, and becomes
-red-hot after 14,000 rounds.
-
-[69] U.S.A. Official Reports on Russo-Japanese War.
-
-[70] _Revue d’Infanterie_, March, 1908.
-
-[71] Officer’s report, U.S.A., Russo-Japanese War.
-
-
-
-
- TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE
-
- Obvious typographical errors and punctuation errors have been
- corrected after careful comparison with other occurrences within
- the text and consultation of external sources.
-
- Except for those changes noted below, all misspellings in the text,
- and inconsistent or archaic usage, have been retained.
-
- Pg 57: ‘moral action’ replaced by ‘morale action’.
- Pg 70: ‘should aways’ replaced by ‘should always’.
- Pg 114: ‘moral effect’ replaced by ‘morale effect’.
- Pg 119: ‘M. Ulrich’ replaced by ‘M. Ullrich’.
- Pg 125: ‘moral effect’ replaced by ‘morale effect’.
- Pg 133: ‘moral effect’ replaced by ‘morale effect’.
- Pg 152: ‘same fate befel’ replaced by ‘same fate befell’.
- Pg 173: ‘moral effect’ replaced by ‘morale effect’.
- Pg 183: ‘moral effect’ replaced by ‘morale effect’.
- Pg 220: ‘moral effect’ replaced by ‘morale effect’.
- Pg 222: ‘he held in’ replaced by ‘be held in’.
- Pg 258: ‘the moral “knock-out”’ replaced by ‘the morale “knock-out”’.
-
-
-*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MACHINE-GUN TACTICS ***
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the
-United States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
- you are located before using this eBook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that:
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without
-widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.